Canon Fax Machine L380S User Manual

Please read this guide before operating this equipment.  
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place  
for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT!  
Appendix C describes important information  
exclusively for specified countries. If you find your  
country name in Appendix C, be sure to read it.  
This equipment conforms to the essential requirements of EC  
Directive 1999/5/EC.  
We declare that this product conforms to the EMC  
requirements of EC Directive 1999/5/EC at nominal mains  
input 230 V, 50Hz although the rated input of the product is  
200–240 V, 50/60Hz. This equipment has been tested in a  
typical system to comply with the technical requirements of  
EMC Directive. Use of shielded cable is required to comply  
with the technical requirements of EMC Directive.  
If you move to another EU country and are experiencing  
trouble please call the Canon Help Desk.  
(For Europe Only)  
Model Name  
H12425 (FAX-L380S)  
H12425 (FAX-L390)  
Copyright  
Copyright © 2005 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this  
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval  
system, or translated into any language or computer language in any form or  
by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or  
otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks  
Canon® is a registered trademark, and UHQis a trademark of Canon Inc.  
IBM® is a registered trademark.  
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation.  
Other brand and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks  
of their respective companies.  
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon has determined  
that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines  
for energy efficiency. The International ENERGY  
STAR® Office Equipment Program is an international  
program that promotes energy saving through the use  
of computers and other office equipment. The program  
backs the development and dissemination of products  
with functions that effectively reduce energy  
consumption. It is an open system in which business  
proprietors can participate voluntarily. The targeted  
products are office equipment such as computers,  
displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. Their  
standards and logos are uniform among participating  
nations.  
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new  
generation of fax machines that use ITU-T V.34 standard  
33.6Kbps* modems. Super G3 High Speed Fax machines  
allow transmission time of approx. 3 seconds* per page  
which results in reduced telephone line charges.  
* Approx. 3 seconds per page fax data transmission time based on Canon FAX  
Standard Chart No.1, (Standard Mode) at 33.6Kbps modem speed. The Public  
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8Kbps modem speeds or  
lower, depending on telephone line conditions.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Information  
Laser Safety Information  
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body.  
For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this product  
is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and  
external cover. No radiation can leak from the product in  
the normal operation of the product by the user.  
This product is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product  
under IEC 60825-1: 1993 and EN 60825-1: 1994.  
200V-240V model  
The label shown below is attached to the laser scan  
machine on the product.  
This product has been classified under IEC 60825-1: 1993  
and EN60825-1: 1994, and conforms to the following classes:  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE  
CLASSE 1  
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1  
PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1  
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1  
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED IN THIS GUIDE MAY RESULT IN  
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
Caution  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 1  
Introducing FAX-L380S/L390  
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
The Main Features of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Plain Paper Fax Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Printer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Copier Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Telephone Features*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Using the Machine With the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Using Your Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Type Conventions Used in This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Illustrations Used in This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Chapter 2  
Setting Up Your Machine  
Choosing a Location for Your Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Unpacking Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Do You Have Everything?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Removing Shipping Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Assembling the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Attaching Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Document Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Output Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Installing the Paper Cassette* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Making Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Connecting the Machine to Your PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Setting the Display Language and Country* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Getting Acquainted With Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
The Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Special Function Buttons (One-Touch Speed Dial Panel Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
Energy Saver Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16  
Setting the Energy Saver Mode Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16  
Restoring from the Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16  
The Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Handling and Storing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Installing/Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
Loading Recording Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21  
Loading Paper in the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22  
Testing the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Registering Information in the Machine  
Guidelines for Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Personalizing Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Identifying Your Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Entering the Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Registering Your Fax Number and Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Setting the Telephone Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Setting the Summer Time*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Chapter 4  
Paper Handling  
Print Media Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Printing Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Loading Paper in the Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Loading Envelopes in the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Loading an Envelope in the Multi-Purpose Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Orientation of the Document and the Paper Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Selecting the Paper Output Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Paper Type and Paper Output Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Face Down Paper Output Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Face Up Paper Output Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Chapter 5  
Speed Dialing  
Speed Dialing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
One-Touch Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Storing Numbers for One-Touch Speed Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Changing or Deleting a Number/Name Stored Under a One-Touch Speed Dial Button . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Coded Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Storing Numbers for Coded Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Changing or Deleting a Number/Name Stored under a Coded Speed Dialing Code. . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Using Coded Speed Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Group Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Creating Groups for Group Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Changing or Deleting a Number/Name Stored under a Group Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Using Group Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Directory Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
Chapter 6  
Sending Faxes  
Preparing to Send a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Document Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Scanning Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Loading Documents in the ADF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Adjusting the Resolution and Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Adjusting the Exposure (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
Sending Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
Memory Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
Manual Sending Via the Handset*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
Dialing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Sending Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Memory Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Manual Sending Via the Handset* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canceling Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Canceling Memory Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
While Documents Are Being Scanned Using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
After All Documents Are Scanned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Manual Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Automatic Redialing With Memory Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Canceling Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Setting Up Automatic Redialing* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Sequential Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Sending a Document to More Than One Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Sending a Document Using Group Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Delayed Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15  
Chapter 7  
Receiving Faxes  
Different Ways to Receive a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Setting the Receive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Receiving Faxes and Phone Calls Automatically:  
FaxTel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Setting the Options for FaxTel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
What Happens When FaxTel Mode is Selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Receiving Faxes Manually: Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Receiving Faxes Automatically: FaxOnly Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Using an Answering Machine: AnsMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Using the Machine With an Answering Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Receiving Faxes in Memory When a Problem Occurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Receiving While Performing Other Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Canceling an Incoming Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Chapter 8  
Setting Up and Using Polling  
What’s Polling? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Requesting Another Fax to Send a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Setting Up Polling Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Setting Up a Polling Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Changing the Polling Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Deleting a Polling Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
Chapter 9  
Restricting the Use of the Machine  
Setting and Using the System Administrator’s ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Setting the System Administrator’s ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Changing/Canceling the System Administrator’s ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department ID Management). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Setting Operation Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Turning Restrictions OFF or ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Operating the Machine with Restrictions ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Checking and Clearing the Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Chapter 10  
Special Features  
Special Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1  
Dialing Through a Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1  
Registering the Access Type and Outside Line Access Number Under the R button . . . . . 10-1  
Dialing Long Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2  
How to Enter Pauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2  
Using Tone Dialing On a Pulse Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restricting Use of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Enabling Restriction of Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Canceling Restriction of Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Using Memory Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6  
Turning Memory Lock ON and Setting the Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6  
Turning Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Chapter 11  
Making Copies  
Making Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1  
Specifying the Paper Size and Type (Common for Cassette and Multi-Purpose Feeder) . . . . . . 11-2  
Specifying the Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Specifying the Paper Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Setting Enlarging/Reducing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Enlarging/Reducing Using Preset Copy Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Enlarging/Reducing Using Custom Copy Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5  
Improving Copied Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
Adjusting the Exposure (Density). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
Adjusting Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
Adjusting Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7  
Special Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8  
Collate Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8  
Reserve Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9  
Confirming the Copy Job You Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10  
Deleting the Copy Job You Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10  
Chapter 12  
System Monitor  
Checking the Status of Copy, Fax, Print and Report Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1  
Confirming Transmission Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1  
Confirming Transmission Results and Sending Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2  
Confirming and Deleting a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3  
Confirming and Deleting a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3  
Confirming and Deleting a Report Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4  
Chapter 13  
Reports and Lists  
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1  
Department ID Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2  
Transmission (TX) Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3  
Error TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3  
TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4  
Multi TX/RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4  
Reception (RX) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5  
Memory Clear Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6  
Speed Dialing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7  
One-Touch Speed Dial List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8  
Coded Speed Dial List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9  
Group Dial List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10  
User’s Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11  
Department Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13  
Document Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14  
Cancel Report Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 14  
Troubleshooting  
Clearing Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1  
Removing Jammed Paper from Inside the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1  
Removing Jammed Paper from the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7  
LCD Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8  
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11  
Paper Feeding Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12  
Faxing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15  
Sending Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15  
Receiving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17  
Telephone Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20  
Copying Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21  
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22  
Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24  
If You Cannot Solve the Problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25  
Chapter 15  
Chapter 16  
Maintaining Your Machine  
Cleaning the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1  
Cleaning the Machine’s Exterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2  
Cleaning the ADF Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2  
Transporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5  
The Menu System  
Accessing the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1  
Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2  
1. PAPER SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2  
2. COMMON SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3  
3. COPY SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5  
5. ADD. REGISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14  
6. PRINTER SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14  
7. TIMER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15  
8. SYSTEM SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16  
9. PRINT LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1  
Plain Paper Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2  
Copier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4  
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5  
Printable Area: Papers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6  
Printable Area: Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7  
Document Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8  
Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9  
Appendix B  
Attaching the Optional Handset to the Machine  
Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1  
Attaching the Handset to Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2  
Adjusting the Ringer Volume Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4  
Maintaining Your Handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
Country-Specific Features  
United Kingdom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Connecting External Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Ringer Equivalence Number (R.E.N.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Applicable Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Connecting the Telephone Line Cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Connecting a Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Connecting an Answering Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Glossary  
Index  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Introducing FAX-L380S/L390  
CHAPTER  
This chapter introduces you to the main features of the machine. It also explains how to get the most out of the  
documentation that comes with the machine, and gives important safety instructions.  
Welcome  
Thank you for purchasing the new Canon FAX-L380S/L390 models. We are sure that your machine will  
meet your printing and copying needs easily and conveniently, as well as your fax and phone  
requirements.  
FAX-L380S  
FAX-L390  
Welcome  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Main Features of the Machine  
The machine is a multifunction system for your home or small office, and combines a plain paper fax  
machine, a printer, a copier, and a telephone* into a single, convenient desktop machine.  
1
The machine’s multitasking ability enables you to perform multiple operations simultaneously. For  
example, you can print a document or make copies at the same time you are sending a fax.  
The compact size of the machine makes it ideal for desktop use, and allows you to use it in places  
where other machines may not fit.  
Plain Paper Fax Features  
UHQ™ Image Processing System  
The machine uses Canon’s Ultra High Quality Image Processing System to provide enhanced definition in faxed  
photos.  
Error Correction Mode (ECM)  
The machine’s Error Correction Mode (ECM) reduces transmission errors while communicating with another  
ECM-capable machine.  
Automatic switching between fax and voice calls*  
The machine can automatically distinguish between fax and voice calls, so that you can receive both through a  
single phone line.  
Answering machine connection  
You can connect an answering machine to receive telephone messages while you are away.  
Transmission speed  
The machine uses G3 data encoding methods that increase transmission speed to approx. 3 seconds** per page.  
Memory sending/receiving  
The machine can store up to 510** fax pages of A4-size in its memory, and can receive faxes while printing.  
Reduced-size printing  
The machine automatically scales received faxes to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine.  
Automatic dialing and broadcasting  
For easier faxing, the machine provides One-Touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing, and Group Dialing  
methods for automatic dialing. It also allows you to broadcast or send a fax at a preset time to as many as 141  
locations (210 locations for the FAX-L390 model).  
*
With optional handset or other telephone connected. This feature is available for certain countries only.  
** Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No.1, standard mode.  
The Main Features of the Machine  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printer Features  
Excellent print quality  
The machine offers 1,200 dpi enhanced × 600 dpi laser beam printing, providing you with high resolution text and  
graphics.  
Simple maintenance  
The Cartridge T Starter and the regular Cartridge T for the machine contain both the toner and drum, making  
installation and replacement simple.  
1
Economy toner-saving printing  
The machine includes an economy printing mode which allows you to reduce toner consumption by approx. 30%.  
Copier Features  
Up to 99 copies  
The machine can make up to 99 copies of a document at a time, at a rate of up to 18 copies per minute.  
Resolution  
The machine scans documents at 300 × 300 dpi. Printing resolution is 1,200 dpi enhanced × 600 dpi.  
Copy enlargement/reduction  
The machine can reduce or enlarge copies in the range between 50% and 200% of their original size.  
Collate copy  
The machine can sort copies in page order. It is convenient when you make multiple copies of a multiple page  
document.  
Telephone Features*  
Automatic dialing  
The machine’s three automatic dialing methods (One-Touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing, and Group  
Dialing) can be used to store phone and fax numbers for easy and efficient calling.  
Connection for the optional handset, an answering machine, or a telephone  
Connecting the optional handset or a telephone to the machine allows you to use it to make and receive normal  
telephone calls. In addition, connecting an answering machine allows you to receive faxes and phone messages  
while you are away from your desk.  
*
This feature is available for certain countries only.  
The Main Features of the Machine  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using the Machine With the Printer Driver  
The printer driver that is included with your machine allows you to use the machine’s printing function  
directly from your PC.  
1
Use the machine as the default printer for Windows applications  
For more information on using the printer driver with your machine, refer to the Software Guide also  
stored on the CD-ROM.  
System Requirements  
The printer driver for Windows 98/Me/2000/XP can be used in the following system environments.  
Operating System  
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP (x86 architecture).  
Computer  
Any computer on which Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP runs properly.  
Hardware Environment  
Using the CARPS software requires following computer environment:  
IBM or IBM-compatible PC  
CD-ROM drive or network environment with the access to the CD-ROM  
PC equipped with a USB port and the USB class driver installed  
OS  
Windows 98  
Windows Me  
CPU  
RAM  
Available free disk space  
®
Intel Pentium 90 MHz or greater  
®
32 MB or greater** 115 MB or greater****  
Intel Pentium 150 MHz or greater 32 MB or greater** 115 MB or greater****  
®
Intel Pentium 133 MHz or greater,  
Windows 2000*  
Professional  
or compatible micro processors (up 64 MB or greater*** 500 MB or greater  
to 2 processors are supported)  
®
Pentium Family  
Windows XP*  
64 MB or greater*** 500 MB or greater  
300 MHz or greater  
* Logon as a user account with Administrators’ rights is recommended.  
**64 MB or greater is recommended.  
***128 MB or greater is recommended.  
****200 MB or greater is recommended.  
Using the Machine With the Printer Driver  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Your Documentation  
Your machine includes the following documentation to help you learn how to use your machine:  
Starter Guide  
1
This Guide provides basic information on how to set up and use the machine.  
User’s Guide (this Guide)  
This Guide provides detailed information on how to use and troubleshoot your machine.  
Software Guide  
This Guide (stored in the CD-ROM) describes how to use the machine to print from your PC.  
Type Conventions Used in This Guide  
This Guide follows the conventions below to emphasize certain information that will help you use your  
machine correctly and safely:  
CAUTION  
Cautions tell you how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your machine.  
NOTE  
Notes provide advice for using your machine more effectively, describe operating restrictions, and tell how to avoid  
minor operating difficulties.  
In addition, this Guide uses brackets to show button and switch names on the machine, such as [Start],  
and [OK]. Text that appears in the machine’s display is shown in capital letters, such as: <RECEPTION  
OK>.  
Also, Appendix C describes the country specific features.  
Illustrations Used in This Guide  
Unless otherwise mentioned, illustrations used in this guide are those taken when no optional  
equipment is attached to FAX-L380S.  
When there is any difference between FAX-L380S and FAX-L390, it is clearly indicated in the text, e.g.,  
“Only for the FAX-L380S model.”  
Using Your Documentation  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Instructions  
Read these safety instructions thoroughly before using your machine, and keep them handy in case  
you need to refer to them later.  
1
CAUTION  
Except as specifically described in this User’s Guide, do not attempt to service the machine yourself.  
Never attempt to disassemble the machine: opening and removing its interior covers will expose you  
to dangerous voltages and other risks. For all service, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or  
the Canon help line.  
Always follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine.  
Use the machine only on a sturdy, stable, level surface. If the machine falls, it could be seriously  
damaged.  
Do not use the machine near water. If you spill liquid on or into the machine, unplug it immediately  
and call your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.  
The back of the machine includes slots and openings for ventilation. To keep the machine from  
overheating (which can cause it to operate abnormally and create a fire risk), take care not to block  
or cover these openings. Do not operate the machine on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar soft  
surface, or near a radiator or other heat source. Do not place the machine in a closet or cabinet or on  
shelves unless adequate ventilation is available. See “Choosing a Location for Your Machine,on  
p. 2-1 for guidelines on how much space the machine needs for ventilation.  
Operate the machine only from the type of power source indicated on the machine’s label. If you are  
unsure of the type of power available from your wall outlets, contact your local power company.  
Make sure the total amperage used by all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the  
ampere rating of the outlet’s circuit breaker.  
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not place the machine where the cord will be  
walked on. Make sure the cord is not knotted or kinked.  
Do not insert object of any kind into the slots or openings on the machine’s cabinet, as they could  
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts, and result in fire or electric shock.  
Do not allow small objects (such as pins, paper clips, or staples) to fall into the machine. If something  
does fall into it, unplug the machine immediately and call your local authorized Canon dealer or the  
Canon help line.  
Do not plug the power cord into an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).  
Always unplug the machine before moving or cleaning it.  
Whenever you unplug the machine, wait at least 5 seconds before you plug it back in.  
Keep the machine away from direct sunlight, as this can damage it. If you have to place it near a  
window, install heavy curtains or blinds.  
Do not expose the machine to extreme temperature fluctuations. Install the machine in a place with  
temperatures between 10° and 32.5°C.  
Always unplug the machine during thunderstorms.  
Before you transport the machine, remove the toner cartridge.  
Safety Instructions  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Always lift the machine as shown below. Never lift it by its paper cassette or other supports.  
1
CAUTION  
Unplug the machine and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line in any of  
these situations:  
-
-
-
-
If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.  
If liquid spills into the machine, or if it is otherwise exposed to rain or liquids.  
If you notice smoke, unusual noises or odor coming from it.  
If the machine does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Adjust only  
those controls that are covered by the operating instructions in this User’s Guide, or you can  
damage the machine and require extensive repair work.  
-
-
If the machine is dropped or its cabinet damaged.  
If the machine begins performing poorly, and you cannot correct the problem by following the  
procedures in Chapter 14, “Troubleshooting.”  
-
This product emits low level electromagnetic waves. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel  
abnormalities, please move away from this product and consult your doctor.  
Customer Support  
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble-free operation. If you encounter  
a problem with the machine’s operation, try to solve it by using the information in Chapter 14.  
If you cannot solve the problem or if you think your machine needs servicing, contact your local  
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.  
Safety Instructions  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Setting Up Your Machine  
CHAPTER  
This chapter tells you how to unpack, assemble, and connect your machine, install the toner cartridge, and load paper  
— everything you need to know to get your machine ready to use.  
Choosing a Location for Your Machine  
Before unpacking your machine, follow these guidelines to choose an appropriate location for the  
machine.  
CAUTION  
Please review the information provided in “Safety Instructions,on p. 1-6, to make sure you are  
installing your machine for safe use.  
Put the machine in a cool, dry, clean, well ventilated place:  
- Make sure the area is free from dust.  
- Make sure the location is not affected by extreme temperature fluctuations, and remains between  
10° and 32.5°C.  
- Make sure the area’s relative humidity is always between 20% and 80%.  
Keep the machine away from direct sunlight.  
If possible, place the machine near an existing telephone outlet, to allow for an easy connection of  
the telephone line to the machine.  
Place the machine near an electrical wall outlet that provides 200 to 240-volt AC (50 to 60 Hz) power.  
Place the machine near the PC you will be connecting it to. Make sure you can reach it easily, as you  
will be using the machine as a printer, fax machine, copier, and telephone.  
Do not plug the machine into the same circuit as an appliance such as an air conditioner, electric  
typewriter, television, or copier. Such devices generate electrical noise that can interfere with your  
machine’s ability to send or receive faxes.  
Set the machine on a flat, stable, vibration-free surface that is strong enough to support its weight  
(about 11 kg (12.1 kg for the FAX-L390 model)).  
Choosing a Location for Your Machine  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Unpacking Your Machine  
Follow the directions below to unpack your machine properly, and to make sure you have all of its  
components and documentation.  
2
Do You Have Everything?  
As you unpack the machine, save the carton and packing material in case you want to move or ship the  
machine in the future.  
Carefully remove all items from the box. You should have someone help by holding the box while you  
lift the machine and its protective packaging out of the carton.  
Make sure you have the following items:  
FAX-L380S  
FAX-L390  
OUTPUT TRAY  
MAIN UNIT  
DOCUMENT OUTPUT TRAY  
CARTRIDGE T STARTER  
CASSETTE EXTENSION*  
EXTENSION COVER*  
POWER CORD  
TELEPHONE LINE CORD  
DOCUMENTATION  
DESTINATION LABELS  
CD-ROM  
ONE-TOUCH SHEET  
If any of the above items are damaged or missing, notify your local authorized Canon dealer  
immediately.  
*Only for the FAX-L380S model  
Unpacking Your Machine  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
NOTE  
The actual items may differ in shape and quantity from the ones shown on p. 2-2.  
Note that the items included with your machine may vary depending on the country of purchase.  
Important! Save your sales receipt for proof of purchase in case your machine requires warranty service.  
If you have purchased the optional handset, see Appendix B for the items included.  
In addition to the items shipped with your machine, if you wish to use the machine as a printer, you will need a  
USB cable, which you can purchase from your Canon dealer. For best results, use a cable that is no more than 5  
meters long.  
Removing Shipping Materials  
2
In order to protect your machine during shipping, the machine has been packed with protective  
material that you must remove before using. Follow these steps:  
NOTE  
The actual shipping materials may differ in shape, quantity, and position from the ones shown in the illustrations  
below.  
1
2
3
Remove all pieces of shipping tape from the exterior of the machine.  
Open the document feeder tray.  
Open the operation panel by grasping it at the center and gently pulling it up.  
Remove protective sheet from the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), then gently close the operation  
panel by pressing it down until it clicks.  
Unpacking Your Machine  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Replaceable Parts  
The only component of the machine that needs regular service or replacement is the Cartridge T.  
The Cartridge T Starter comes with your machine but you should purchase the regular Cartridge T for  
replacement.  
Although Canon manufactures many types of toner cartridges, the Cartridge T is the only one designed  
to be used with your machine. The Cartridge T can be purchased at any Canon authorized dealer.  
2
2-4  
Unpacking Your Machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Assembling the Machine  
Use the following instructions to assemble the main unit and its components. To see how the machine  
will look fully assembled, see “Getting Acquainted With Your Machine,on p. 2-11.  
2
Attaching Components  
NOTE  
Make sure the tabs are inserted into the slot completely.  
Document Output Tray  
Insert the tabs into the slots on the back of the machine.  
Output Tray  
Insert the tray into the corresponding slots.  
Assembling the Machine  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Installing the Paper Cassette*  
1
2
Pull out the paper cassette.  
Attach the cassette extension to the cassette.  
2
3
Attach the extension cover on the back of the machine.  
4
Insert the paper cassette into the machine.  
*Installing the paper cassette is necessary to the FAX-L380S model only.  
2-6  
Assembling the Machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Making Connections  
NOTE  
The use of the jacks may differ in certain countries. See Appendix C, “Country-Specific Features.” for details.  
Be sure to connect any external device before using your machine.  
Canon cannot guarantee that all answering machines will be compatible with your machine, due to varying  
specifications.  
2
If you have connected an external device to your machine, be sure to set the correct receive mode. (See Chapter  
7, “Receiving Faxes.”)  
To connect an extension phone as well as an answering machine, connect the extension phone to the answering  
machine, and then the answering machine to your machine.  
If you connect a data modem to your machine and you use it extensively, or others access your PC frequently  
through the data modem, you may want a dedicated telephone line for your data modem.  
Connecting the Machine to Your PC  
Your machine has a USB port that allows you to connect it to a PC. To do this, you need to purchase a  
USB cable from your dealer.  
NOTE  
For best results, use a cable that is 5 meters in length or shorter.  
Connect the machine to your computer as follows:  
1
2
Make sure the computer is turned off and the machine is unplugged.  
Connect the USB cable to your machine and PC during software installation to ensure the proper  
operation of the printer driver. (See the Software Guide.)  
Making Connections  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting the Telephone Line  
Connect the telephone line to the jack on the left side of the machine:  
Connect the optional handset to  
.
Connect an extension phone or answering  
machine to  
.
2
Connect the supplied telephone line to  
.
Connect the other end of line to a wall telephone jack.  
If you connect an answering machine to the machine, be sure to read your answering machine’s  
manual.  
NOTE  
You can also connect the extension phone to the jack marked  
if you have not connected the optional  
handset.  
Connecting the Power Cord  
CAUTION  
Follow these guidelines when connecting your machine to a power source:  
-
The machine is intended for domestic use only and requires 200-240 V AC. Do not use it outside the  
country where it was purchased.  
-
Use only the power cord that came with the machine. Using a longer cord or extension cord can  
cause the machine to malfunction.  
-
-
Unplug the machine only by pulling on the plug itself. Never pull on the cord.  
Do not plug the machine into an outlet shared with an appliance such as an air conditioner,  
computer, electric typewriter, or copier. These devices generate electrical noise, which can interfere  
with the operation of the machine.  
-
-
-
Make sure nothing is laying on the power cord, and that the cord cannot be walked on or tripped  
over.  
Do not overload the electrical outlet. Make sure the total amperage used by all the machines plugged  
into the outlet does not exceed the ampere rating of the outlet’s circuit breaker.  
Do not plug the machine into an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).  
2-8  
Making Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connect the power cord as follows:  
1
Plug the supplied power cord into the power connector on the back of the machine.  
2
2
Plug the other end of the power cord into the outlet.  
NOTE  
The machine has no power switch, so its power is on as long as it is plugged in. Once connected, though, the  
machine still needs to warm up before you can use it.  
While the machine is warming up, the message <PLEASE WAIT> appears in the LCD display:  
PLEASE WAIT  
When you connect the power cord to an AC outlet for the first time after purchase, <DISPLAY LANGUAGE> will  
appear in the LCD display after <PLEASE WAIT>. In this case, set the language for the LCD display, and the  
country*. (See “Setting the Display Language and Country*,on p. 2-10.)  
The Fax standby mode appears:  
31/12 2005 SAT 15:11  
FaxOnly  
STANDARD  
NOTE  
If the toner cartridge has not been installed yet, the message <INSTALL CARTRIDGE> appears in the LCD  
display, and the Alarm indicator flashes. In this case, install the toner cartridge. (See “Installing/Replacing the  
Toner Cartridge,” on p. 2-18.)  
*
The country selection feature is available for certain countries only.  
Making Connections  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Display Language and Country*  
When you connect the power cord to an AC outlet for the first time, you need to select the language for  
the LCD display. For some countries, you also need to select the country where you are using the  
machine. The machine automatically switches the selectable settings and the default settings in the  
menus to suit the selected country.  
2
Follow these steps to set the display language and country.  
After connecting the power cord, the display changes from <PLEASE WAIT> to the <DISPLAY  
LANGUAGE> menu.  
1
2
Use [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the preferred language for the LCD display press [OK].  
DISPLAY LANGUAGE  
ENGLISH  
COUNTRY SELECT  
UK  
<
>
If <COUNTRY SELECT> does not appear after <DATA ENTRY OK> is displayed:  
Setting is completed and the machine enters the Fax standby mode.  
If <COUNTRY SELECT> appears after <DATA ENTRY OK> is displayed:  
Go to step 2.  
Use [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the country where you are using the machine press [OK].  
COUNTRY SELECT  
UK  
31/12 2005 SAT 15:11  
FaxOnly  
STANDARD  
If your country name does not appear, select <OTHERS>.  
Once you have selected the language and country, these setting menus will not appear next time you connect the  
power cord.  
To check the settings made by the country selection, you can print the USER’S DATA LIST. (See “User’s Data  
List,on p. 13-11.)  
You can change the display language or country setting using the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu in the <FAX  
SETTINGS> menu. (See Chapter 16, “The Menu System.)  
*
The country selection feature is available for certain countries only.  
Setting the Display Language and Country*  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Acquainted With Your Machine  
Before using your machine, look over the diagrams on these pages to become familiar with the  
machine’s components.  
2
Front View  
FAX-L380S  
a
b
Document feeder tray  
Place documents.  
f
g
Output tray  
Outputs printouts.  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)  
Holds documents and feeds them automatically into the scanning  
machine.  
Printer cover  
Open it when you install the cartridge, or remove jammed  
paper.  
c
d
e
Document output tray  
Documents come out here.  
h
i
Multi-purpose feeder  
Used when printing paper one by one manually.  
Slide guides  
Adjust to the width of documents.  
Cassette  
Holds the paper supply.  
Operation panel  
Controls the machine.  
Getting Acquainted With Your Machine  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
FAX-L390  
2
a
b
Document feeder tray  
Place documents.  
f
g
Output tray  
Outputs printouts.  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)  
Printer cover  
Holds documents and feeds them automatically into the scanning  
Open it when you install the cartridge, or remove jammed  
machine.  
paper.  
c
d
e
Document output tray  
Documents come out here.  
h
i
Multi-purpose feeder  
Used when printing paper one by one manually.  
Slide guides  
Adjust to the width of documents.  
Cassette  
Holds the paper supply.  
Operation panel  
Controls the machine.  
2-12  
Getting Acquainted With Your Machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Rear View  
FAX-L380S  
2
FAX-L390  
a
USB port  
Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.  
e
f
g
Rear cover  
Open it when you output paper face up, or remove jammed paper.  
b
c
d
Handset jack  
Connect the handset (optional).  
Power socket  
Connect the power cord.  
Extension phone jack  
Connect an extension phone.  
Extension cover  
Protects paper supply in the cassette from dirt and dust.  
Telephone line jack  
Connect the telephone cable.  
Getting Acquainted With Your Machine  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
The Operation Panel  
l
FAX-L380S  
COPY  
FAX  
ABC  
JKL  
TUV  
DEF  
MNO  
01  
05  
09  
13  
17  
02  
06  
10  
14  
18  
03  
07  
11  
15  
19  
04  
08  
12  
16  
20  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI  
P
2
PQRS  
WXYZ  
OK  
T
FAX-L390  
COPY  
FAX  
ABC  
JKL  
TUV  
DEF  
MNO  
01  
05  
09  
13  
17  
02  
06  
10  
14  
18  
03  
07  
11  
15  
19  
04  
08  
12  
16  
20  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI  
P
PQRS  
WXYZ  
OK  
T
a
b
Menu button  
Use this button to customize the operation of the machine.  
h
i
j
Energy Saver button  
Use this button to set or cancel the energy saver mode manually.  
The button lights green when the energy saver mode is enabled.  
In Use/Memory indicator  
Lights when the telephone line is used or a document has been  
received in memory.  
Numeric buttons  
Use these buttons to enter numbers and names when registering  
information, and to dial fax/telephone numbers.  
c
LCD display  
Tone button  
The LCD display shows messages and prompts while you use the  
machine.  
Use this button to use tone dialing temporarily when your machine  
is set for pulse dialing.  
d
e
f
COPY button  
Use this button to switch standby display to Copy mode.  
k
l
m
Enlarge/Reduce button  
Use this button to set an enlargement or reduction ratio of a copy.  
FAX button  
Use this button to switch standby display to Fax mode.  
Exposure button  
Use this button to adjust the copy exposure.  
Alarm indicator  
This indicator flashes when an error occurs, or when the machine  
Image Quality button  
is out of paper or toner.  
Use this button to select the resolution the machine will use for  
the document you want to fax, or copy.  
g
System Monitor button  
Use this button to check the status of copy, fax, print and report  
jobs.  
2-14  
Getting Acquainted With Your Machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
n
Stop/Reset button  
Use this button to cancel sending or receiving faxes and other  
operations, and bring back the standby display in the LCD.  
s
t
u
Directory button  
Use this button to look up fax/telephone numbers registered for  
speed dialing.  
o
p
q
r
(-), (+) buttons  
Use this button to scroll through the selections.  
Coded Dial button  
Use this button to dial a fax/telephone number that you have  
registered for Coded Speed Dialing.  
OK button  
P
Redial/Pause button  
Use this button to determine the contents you set or register.  
Use this button to redial the last number that was dialed using the  
numeric buttons, or to enter pauses in a fax number.  
Start button  
Use this button to begin faxing, or copying.  
v
w
One-Touch Speed Dial buttons  
Use these buttons for One-Touch Speed Dialing.  
Hook button  
Use this button to dial, even with the optional handset still in the  
handset cradle.  
One-Touch Speed Dial panel  
Open this panel to access the registration buttons.  
2
Special Function Buttons (One-Touch Speed Dial Panel  
Open)  
21  
25  
29  
22  
26  
30  
23  
27  
31  
24  
28  
ID  
Receive  
Mode  
Delayed  
Report  
Space  
Transmission  
Polling  
R
Delete  
Clear  
a
b
c
Report button  
Use this button to print activity reports.  
e
f
g
ID button  
Use this button to enter the Department ID.  
Receive Mode button  
Use this button to select the receive mode for receiving faxes.  
Delayed Transmission button  
Use this button to register a time for delayed sending.  
R button  
Polling button  
Use this button to dial an outside line access number when the  
Use this button to set a document for polling sending, and to poll  
machine is connected through a switchboard (PBX).  
the other fax to receive a document.  
d
Space button  
Use this button to enter a space between letters and numbers  
when you are registering information.  
h
i
Clear button  
Use this button to clear an entire entry during information  
registration.  
Delete button  
Use this button to delete characters one by one.  
Getting Acquainted With Your Machine  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
Energy Saver Mode  
The machine provides an energy saver function. When no operations are performed for about 5  
minutes, the machine automatically enters the energy saver mode.  
NOTE  
2
The time until the machine enters the energy saver mode can be specified in a range of 3 minutes to 30 minutes.  
You can also turn off the energy saver function. (See Chapter 16, “The Menu System.)  
The energy saver function does not activate when the machine is in the following status:  
-
-
-
When printing out copies, faxes or other pages  
When sending or receiving faxes  
While a copy job is saved in memory or when the reserve copy or other functions are operating, or when the In  
Use/Memory indicator lights up  
-
-
-
When paper jams occur  
When an error code appears and the Alarm indicator flashes  
When no paper is loaded in the cassette  
Setting the Energy Saver Mode Manually  
1
Press [Energy Saver].  
The LCD is turned off and [Energy Saver] lights up.  
NOTE  
Right after the machine is restored from the energy saver mode, or right after copying finishes, wait about 2  
seconds before pressing [Energy Saver].  
Restoring from the Energy Saver Mode  
1
Press [Energy Saver].  
[Energy Saver] goes off and the machine enters standby mode.  
NOTE  
The machine can be restored from the energy saver mode immediately. However, it may vary according to room  
temperature and circumstances.  
Energy Saver Mode  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The Toner Cartridge  
Handling and Storing Cartridges  
Do not open the drum protective shutter on the cartridge. If the drum surface is exposed to light and  
damaged, print quality may deteriorate.  
2
Do not stand the cartridge on end, and do not turn it upside down. If toner becomes caked in the  
cartridge, it may prove impossible to free it even by shaking the cartridge.  
Keep the cartridge away from computer screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The magnet inside the  
cartridge may harm these items.  
HDD  
Never touch the drum protective shutter. When holding the cartridge, avoid touching the drum  
protective shutter with your hands.  
The Toner Cartridge  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Do not expose the cartridge to direct sunlight or bright light for longer than 5 minutes.  
Do not store the cartridge in direct sunlight.  
Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or rapid changes in temperature. Store the  
cartridge between 0° and 35°C.  
Hold the cartridge as shown so that your hand is not touching the drum’s protective shutter.  
Store the cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open the bag until you are ready to install the  
cartridge in the machine.  
Save the protective bag. You may need to repack and transport the cartridge at a later date.  
Do not store the cartridge in salty air or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol  
sprays.  
Do not remove the cartridge from the machine unless necessary.  
Be sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine when disposing of the machine.  
2
CAUTION  
DO NOT PLACE THE CARTRIDGE IN FIRE. TONER POWDER IS FLAMMABLE.  
Installing/Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
The machine uses the Canon Cartridge T. The procedure on the next page explains how to install the  
cartridge for the first time, and how to replace it when the toner runs out.  
When the message <REPLACE CARTRIDGE> appears, the toner in the cartridge may simply be  
unevenly distributed. Before replacing the cartridge, follow the instructions on p. 2-19 to evenly  
distribute the toner. If the message remains displayed or the print quality is low, after doing this replace  
the cartridge as described below.  
NOTE  
Canon makes numerous cartridges. However, the Canon genuine Cartridge T Starter and the Canon genuine  
regular Cartridge T are the only one which Canon recommends you to use with your machine. The Canon genuine  
Cartridge T Starter that comes with your machine can yield approx. 2,500 page of printouts (based on 5%  
coverage of a A4-size page), while the Canon genuine Cartridge T you purchase can yield approx. 3,500 page of  
printouts (based on 5% coverage of a A4-size page). But the Canon genuine Cartridge T Starter is identical to the  
Canon genuine regular Cartridge T otherwise.  
1
2
3
Remove any documents and/or printed pages from the machine.  
Make sure the machine is plugged in.  
Remove the cartridge from the bag. Keep the bag in a safe place for future use.  
2-18  
The Toner Cartridge  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Gently rock the cartridge several times to evenly distribute the toner inside.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
DRUM PROTECTIVE SHUTTER  
2
NOTE  
Always hold the cartridge as shown so that the side with the instructions is facing upward. Do not forcefully move  
or push the protective shutter of the drum in any way.  
5
6
Hold the cartridge on a flat stable surface with one hand, and break the tab and pull out the seal  
completely with the other hand.  
TAB  
Open the printer cover.  
NOTE  
If you are replacing the old cartridge with the new one, remove the old cartridge from the machine. Then, discard  
the old toner cartridge immediately according to the local laws and regulations for disposal of consumables.  
The Toner Cartridge  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
8
Hold the cartridge and position the arrow mark on the cartridge towards the inside of the machine as  
shown below.  
2
Align the projections  
on both sides of the cartridge to the guides  
in the machine and slide the  
cartridge completely into the machine.  
9
Close the printer cover.  
2-20  
The Toner Cartridge  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Recording Paper  
When the message <SUPPLY REC. PAPER> appears in the LCD display, you need to add paper to the  
paper cassette. Here are a few tips you should follow when you load paper into the paper cassette.  
Be sure to load paper of the correct size, weight, and quantity recommended for your machine. (See  
Chapter 4, “Paper Handling.)  
2
Stack the paper so that the top and bottom edges and sides are straight and even before placing it in  
the paper cassette.  
Do not print on both sides of the paper. Doing so may cause several sheets to feed into the machine  
at the same time.  
Let the paper run out before you refill the paper cassette.  
Avoid mixing new stock with paper already loaded in the paper cassette. When adding new stock to  
the cassette, be sure to remove the remaining paper in the cassette and reload it together with the  
new stock. Failure to do so may cause paper jams.  
NOTE  
Do not use damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper as these can cause paper jams or poor print quality.  
Highly textured, extremely smooth or shiny paper does not print well.  
The laser printing process uses high temperatures to fuse toner to the paper. Use paper that will not melt,  
vaporize, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes at temperatures near 170°C. For example, do not use vellum paper in  
a laser printer. Make sure any letterhead or colored paper you use can withstand high temperatures.  
Make sure the paper is free of dust, lint, and oil stains.  
To keep the paper from curling, do not open paper packs until you are ready to use the paper. Store unused paper  
from opened packs in a cool, dry location in the original packaging.  
Your machine is factory-set to use A4-size paper in the paper cassette.  
If you wish to use different sized paper, you must change the setting using the <PAPER SETTINGS> menu.  
See p. 16-2 for more details.  
Refer to Chapter 4, “Paper Handling,” for more details on the types of media you can load in the paper cassette.  
CAUTION  
Do not load paper in the multi-purpose feeder when the machine is printing.  
Loading Recording Paper  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper in the Cassette  
1
Pull out the cassette completely.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to completely remove the paper cassette from the machine and place on a flat surface before  
performing the following steps. Failure to do so, may cause the machine tip over, and result in personal  
injury.  
2
2
Adjust the length slide guide to match the paper size.  
FAX-L380S  
FAX-L390  
For the FAX-L390 model, be sure to properly attach the stopper of the paper size rear guide for the correct paper  
size by inserting the tabs into the matching slots on the paper cassette.  
3
Adjust the width slide guides or paper width guides to match the paper size.  
2-22  
Loading Recording Paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Load the paper into the cassette. Make sure the paper stack sits below the hooks for the FAX-L380S  
model.  
HOOKS  
2
5
Even out the edges of the paper stack.  
Make sure the height of the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark.  
HOOKS  
HOOK  
LOAD LIMIT  
MARK  
LOAD LIMIT  
MARK  
HOOK  
6
Insert the cassette into the machine as far as it will go.  
NOTE  
If you do not completely insert the cassette into the machine, paper jams may occur.  
Testing the Machine  
After you have assembled your machine, installed the toner cartridge, loaded plain paper in the paper  
cassette, you can make sure the machine is printing properly by making several copies of a document.  
For instructions, see Chapter 11, “Making Copies.”  
Note the following:  
If the printed sheets are curled as they exit the machine, remove them from the output slot  
immediately to avoid paper jams.  
Make sure your text or graphics fall within the printable area.  
Loading Recording Paper  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering Information in the  
Machine  
3
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes how to enter information in your machine.  
Guidelines for Entering Information  
The following section explains how to enter user information into the machine.  
NOTE  
If you pause while entering information and do not make an entry for more than a specified period of time, the  
machine returns to standby mode and loses all information you had entered up to that point. You will then have to  
start again. The time until the machine returns to the standby mode can be specified in a range of 1 to 9 minutes.  
You can also turn off the AUTO CLEAR function. (See Chapter 16, “The Menu System.)  
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols  
Each numeric button has a number and a group of uppercase and lowercase letters assigned to it. Use  
the chart below to determine which numeric button to press for each character.  
NOTE  
The characters that appear when you press the numeric buttons differ depending on the display language you  
select. For details on selecting the display language, see “Setting the Display Language and Country*,on p. 2-10.  
Guidelines for Entering Information  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Button  
Uppercase  
Lowercase  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
@ . – _ /  
ABC  
@ . – _ /  
abc  
DEF  
def  
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
3
WXYZ  
wxyz  
Uppercase  
Lowercase  
Number  
#
– . # ! “ , ; : ^ _ = / | ’ ? $ @ % & + \ ( ) [ ] { } < >  
Follow this procedure when you come to a step that requires you to enter a name or number.  
1
Press [  
(:1).  
] to switch to the uppercase letter mode (:A), lowercase letter mode (:a), or the number mode  
You can see what mode you are in by the character indicated on the top right corner of the LCD display.  
:A  
_
2
Use the numeric buttons to enter the letter or number.  
Press the button repeatedly until the letter or number you want appears.  
To enter two letters or symbols that are under the same button:  
Press the numeric button [ (+)] press the same numeric button again.  
For example, to enter <DD> you would press [3] [ (+)] [3].  
To enter a space:  
Press [Space] under the One-Touch Speed Dial panel.  
To delete a character:  
Press [Delete] under the One-Touch Speed Dial panel.  
To delete an entire entry:  
Press [Clear] under the One-Touch Speed Dial panel.  
3-2  
Guidelines for Entering Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalizing Your Machine  
Identifying Your Documents  
When sending documents, you can have your fax number, your name, and the current date and time  
printed out by the receiving fax. This information is called your TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)  
and appears at the top of the faxed document in small type.  
3
By identifying the documents you send, the receiving party can recognize your fax messages at a  
glance. Here is a sample document with the identifying information:  
xxxx  
THE DATE AND TIME  
YOU SENT THE  
DOCUMENT  
YOUR FAX/  
TELEPHONE  
NUMBER  
YOUR NAME OR  
COMPANY NAME  
THE NAME OF THE  
PARTY WHO IS  
RECEIVING THE  
FAX*  
THE PAGE NUMBER  
*
When using speed dialing, the top line also includes the name registered under the speed dialing button or code you  
entered.  
Entering the Date and Time  
Follow this procedure to enter the date and time:  
1
2
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <7.TIMER SETTINGS> press [OK] twice.  
Personalizing Your Machine  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
4
Use the numeric buttons to enter the date (month/day/year) and time (in 24-hour format) press [OK].  
DATE/TIME SETTING  
31/12 '05 15:10  
TIMER SETTINGS  
2.AUTO CLEAR  
Enter only the last 2 digits of the year.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Registering Your Fax Number and Name  
Follow this procedure to register your fax/telephone number and name:  
3
1
2
3
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK] four times.  
Use the numeric buttons to enter your fax/telephone number (Max. 20 digits, including spaces) press  
[OK].  
USER TEL NO.  
123xxxxxxx  
TEL LINE SETTINGS  
2.TEL LINE TYPE  
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
Press [Menu] [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.UNIT NAME> press [OK].  
4
5
Use the numeric buttons to enter your name (Max. 24 characters, including spaces) press [OK].  
:A  
USER SETTINGS  
3.TX TERMINAL ID  
Canon  
For details on how to enter or delete characters, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
6
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
3-4  
Personalizing Your Machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Telephone Line Type  
Use this procedure if you need to change the telephone line setting.  
If you are unsure which setting to use, contact your local telephone company.  
Follow this procedure to set the telephone line type:  
1
2
3
4
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK] three times.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.TEL LINE TYPE> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the telephone line type press [OK].  
3
TEL LINE TYPE  
TOUCH TONE  
TEL LINE SETTINGS  
3.TX START SPEED  
You can select from the following:  
-
-
<TOUCH TONE> for tone dialing  
<ROTARY PULSE> for pulse dialing  
5
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Setting the Summer Time*  
Some countries adopt the summer time system that shifts the clock time ahead or back according to  
the change in seasons. You can select if the time information in your machine changes to match your  
country’s summer time system and set the day and time when the summer time begins and ends.  
1
2
3
4
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <7.TIMER SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <5.SUMMER TIME> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <ON> to enable the summer time setting or <OFF> to disable it press  
[OK].  
If you selected <ON>, go to step 5.  
If you selected <OFF>, go to step 12.  
*
The Summer Time feature is available for certain countries only.  
Personalizing Your Machine  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5
6
Press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the month in which the summer time starts press [OK] twice.  
MONTH  
WEEK  
APRIL  
FIRST WEEK  
7
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the week in which the summer time starts press [OK] twice.  
You can select from the following:  
-
-
-
-
-
<
<
<
<
FIRST WEEK>  
SECOND WEEK  
>
THIRD WEEK  
>
3
FOURTH WEEK  
>
<LAST WEEK> (fourth or fifth week depending on the selected month)  
WEEK  
DAY  
SECOND WEEK  
SUNDAY  
8
9
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the day of the week on which the summer time starts press [OK] twice.  
DAY  
TIME  
SUNDAY  
02:00  
Use the numeric buttons to enter the time at which the summer time compensation is made press [OK]  
three times.  
Use the 24-hour format for the time (e.g., 2:00 p.m. as 14:00) and precede single digits with a zero.  
TIME  
MONTH  
02:00  
OCTOBER  
10 Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] and [OK] to select the month, week, day of the week, and time when the summer  
time ends, as in steps 6 to 9 for the <1.BEGIN DATE/TIME> settings. (e.g. OCTOBER LAST WEEK,  
SUNDAY and 03:00)  
11 Press [OK].  
12 Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
3-6  
Personalizing Your Machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Paper Handling  
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes how to select and prepare the print media for the different functions your machine can perform.  
Print Media Requirements  
For high-quality printing, we recommend using paper and transparencies recommended by Canon.  
Some types of paper available at office supply stores may not be suitable for the machine. If you have  
any questions about paper and transparencies, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the  
Canon help line.  
Paper Storage  
In order to prevent paper jams, do the following:  
To prevent moisture buildup, store remaining paper wrapped tightly in its original package. Store  
paper in a dry location, out of direct sunlight.  
To prevent curling, store paper flat, not upright.  
If the paper is curled, uncurl it before loading it in the cassette or multi-purpose feeder. Failure to do  
so will cause paper creases and a paper jam.  
Unacceptable Paper  
Do not print on the following types of paper stock. Doing so may result in paper jams.  
Severely curled or wrinkled paper  
Transparencies designed for full-color copiers or printers  
Paper which has already been copied using a digital full-color copier (Do not print on the reverse  
side.)  
Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on the reverse side.)  
IMPORTANT  
Never attempt to print on full-color transparencies. Doing so may result in product malfunction.  
Print Media Requirements  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Acceptable Paper  
Cassette  
Multi-Purpose Feeder  
FAX-L380S: A4, B5, A5, LTR, EXECUTIVE  
Envelope (COM10, MONARCH, DL, ISO-C5)  
Free Size: 216 mm × 356 mm [Max.]/76 mm ×  
127 mm [Min.]  
A4, B5, A5, LTR, LGL, EXECUTIVE  
Envelope (COM10, MONARCH, DL, ISO-C5)  
Free Size: 216 mm × 356 mm [Max.]/76 mm ×  
127 mm [Min.]  
Paper Size  
FAX-L390: A4, LTR  
2
2
Paper Weight  
Paper Type  
64 g/m to 128 g/m  
FAX-L380S: Plain paper, Plain paper L, Heavy  
Plain paper, Plain paper L, Heavy paper, Heavy  
paper H, Transparency  
paper, Heavy paper H, Transparency  
FAX-L390: Plain paper, Plain paper L  
IMPORTANT  
You cannnot use multi-purpose feeder for FAX.  
4
NOTE  
The printing speed may become slower than usual depending on the paper size, the paper type, and the number  
of sheets you specify. This is because the machine’s safety function works to prevent the failure due to heat.  
Some types of paper may not feed properly into the cassette or the multi-purpose feeder.  
Printing Areas  
Please note that the term “printing area” represents both the recommended area for optimum print  
quality and the entire area where the machine can technically print from your computer.  
Printing area (light shade): Canon recommends that you print within this area.  
Paper  
MAX. 5 mm  
MAX. 5 mm  
MAX. 5 mm  
Feeding  
direction  
MAX. 5 mm  
MAX. 5 mm  
Envelope  
MAX. 5 mm  
MAX. 5 mm  
Feeding  
direction  
MAX. 5 mm  
NOTE  
Copying areas are a little larger than printing areas.  
4-2  
Print Media Requirements  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper  
This section describes how to load paper in the cassette and the multi-purpose feeder.  
CAUTION  
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.  
Be sure to completely remove the paper cassette from the machine and place on a flat surface before  
performing the following steps. Failure to do so, may cause the machine tip over, and result in  
personal injury.  
4
NOTE  
The paper in the multi-purpose feeder is fed prior to the paper in the cassette.  
The cassette holds up to approx. 250 sheets (FAX-L380S)/500 sheets (FAX-L390) of 64 g/m2 paper or approx. 20  
envelopes*.  
*Only for the FAX-L380S model.  
.
Loading Paper in the Cassette  
1
2
Pull out the cassette completely.  
Pinch and slide the length slide guide to fit the size of the paper stack you want to load.  
For the FAX-L390 model, attach the stopper of the paper size rear guide for the desired paper size by inserting  
the tabs into the matching slots on the paper cassette.  
FAX-L380S  
FAX-L390  
IMPORTANT  
If the slide guides (FAX-L380S) are not adjusted correctly for the size of the paper, the quality of your printouts  
may be adversely affected.  
For the FAX-L390 model, be sure to properly attach the stopper of the paper size rear guide for the correct paper  
size.  
Loading Paper  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
Adjust the width slide guides or paper width guides to match the paper size.  
4
4
5
Fan the paper stack first, then tap the edges on a flat surface to even the stack.  
Load the paper stack in the cassette with the print side down.  
When you load paper with a logo on, position the paper with the print side down (logo side) and load it so that the  
top of the paper feeds first in the cassette.  
Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark.  
HOOKS  
HOOK  
LOAD LIMIT  
MARK  
LOAD LIMIT  
MARK  
HOOK  
4-4  
Loading Paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
7
Insert the cassette into the machine.  
NOTE  
If you do not completely insert the cassette into the machine, paper jams may occur.  
Specify the paper size and type.  
Press [Menu] [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1.CASSETTE> press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate paper size press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate paper type press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not load different size and type of paper at the same time.  
Do not load extra paper when there is still paper left in the cassette. If you load extra paper while printing, remove  
4
the loaded paper first. Then put it together with the extra paper and tap the edges. After that, reload it in the  
cassette.  
NOTE  
Select <ENVELOPE> for envelopes. For details on loading envelopes in the cassette*, see “Loading Envelopes in  
the Cassette,” on p. 4-5.  
For information on how to use non-standard size paper, see “Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Feeder,” on p.  
4-8, or “Loading an Envelope in the Multi-Purpose Feeder,on p. 4-9.  
*Only for the FAX-L380S model.  
Loading Envelopes in the Cassette  
NOTE  
Loading Envelopes in the Cassette is only for the FAX-L380S model.  
Load an envelope in the multi-purpose feeder when you use the FAX-L390 model. For details on loading an  
envelope in the multi-purpose feeder, see “Loading an Envelope in the Multi-Purpose Feeder,” on p. 4-9.  
1
Arrange the stack of envelopes on a firm, clean surface, and press down firmly on the edges to make the  
folds crisp.  
Press all the way around the envelopes to remove any curls and expel air from inside the envelopes. Also, press  
firmly on the area that corresponds to the edges of the back flap.  
Loading Paper  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Remove any curling from the envelopes by holding the edges diagonally and bending them gently.  
Run a pen or other rounded object along the back flaps to flatten them.  
The flaps should not bulge more than 5 mm.  
4
FLAP  
4
5
6
Tap the edges on a flat surface to even the envelopes.  
Pull out the cassette completely.  
Pinch and slide the length slide guide to fit the size of the envelopes you want to load.  
IMPORTANT  
If the slide guides are not adjusted correctly for the size of the envelopes, the quality of your printouts may be  
adversely affected.  
4-6  
Loading Paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Load the envelopes with the print side down and the right edge (i.e., closer to the stamp) first.  
If the envelope to be loaded has a flap on the short edge, this edge must enter the machine first. Not loading it  
this way will result in a paper jam.  
8
Pinch and slide the width slide guides to fit the envelopes.  
4
Make sure the envelopes do not exceed the load limit mark.  
HOOKS  
HOOK  
LOAD LIMIT  
MARK  
HOOK  
9
Insert the cassette into the machine.  
NOTE  
If you do not completely insert the cassette into the machine, paper jams may occur.  
10 Specify the paper size and type.  
Press [Menu] [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1.CASSETTE> press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <ENVELOPE> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate envelope type press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <HEAVY PAPER> or <HEAVY PAPER H> press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Loading Paper  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Feeder  
Use the multi-purpose feeder when you want to copy or print on the different paper which is in the  
cassette. Load paper one by one in the multi-purpose feeder.  
NOTE  
The paper in the multi-purpose feeder is fed prior to the paper in the cassette.  
1
Slide the slide guides to fit the size of the paper you want to load.  
4
IMPORTANT  
If the slide guides are not adjusted correctly for the size of the paper, the quality of your printouts may be adversely  
affected.  
2
Insert the paper straightly into the multi-purpose feeder with the print side up.  
NOTE  
When you load paper with a logo on it, position the paper with the print side up (logo side) and insert it so that the  
top of the paper feeds first in the multi-purpose feeder.  
4-8  
Loading Paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Specify the paper size.  
Press [Menu] press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.MP TRAY> press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate paper size press [OK] twice.  
NOTE  
Select <ENVELOPE> for envelopes. For details on loading an envelope in the multi-purpose feeder, see “Loading  
an Envelope in the Multi-Purpose Feeder,on p. 4-9.  
When <FREESIZE> is selected, you can specify vertical and horizontal sizes of the paper in the following ranges:  
-
<VERTICAL SIZE>: 127 mm to 356 mm  
<HORIZONTAL SIZE>: 76 mm to 216 mm  
-
Specify the paper type.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate paper type press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
4
Loading an Envelope in the Multi-Purpose Feeder  
Use the multi-purpose feeder when you want to copy or print an envelope one by one.  
IMPORTANT  
The recommended envelopes are COM10, MONARCH, DL, and ISO-C5. Using other envelopes may affect the  
quality of the printout.  
NOTE  
The envelope in the multi-purpose feeder is fed prior to the paper in the cassette.  
1
Slide the slide guides to fit the size of the envelope you want to load.  
Loading Paper  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMPORTANT  
If the slide guides are not adjusted correctly for the size of the envelope, the quality of your printouts may be  
adversely affected.  
2
Insert the envelope straightly in the multi-purpose feeder with the print side up and the right edge (i.e.,  
closer to the stamp) first.  
If the envelope to be loaded has a flap on the short edge, this edge must enter the machine first. Not loading it  
this way will result in a paper jam.  
4
3
4
Specify the paper size.  
Press [Menu] press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.MP TRAY> press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <ENVELOPE> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate envelope type press [OK] twice.  
NOTE  
You can select <FREESIZE> instead of <ENVELOPE> as the paper size. When <FREESIZE> is selected, you  
can specify vertical and horizontal sizes of the envelope in the following ranges:  
-
-
<VERTICAL SIZE>: 127 mm to 356 mm  
<HORIZONTAL SIZE>: 76 mm to 216 mm  
Specify the paper type.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <HEAVY PAPER> or <HEAVY PAPER H> press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
4-10  
Loading Paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Orientation of the Document and the Paper Loading  
When you load a document in the ADF, the orientation of the document and the orientation of the paper  
in the cassette or in the multi-purpose feeder are as shown below.  
DOCUMENT  
PAPER  
CASSETTE  
MULTI-PURPOSE  
FEEDER  
4
COPY  
Loading Paper  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting the Paper Output Area  
Face down paper output delivers paper with the printed side down on the output tray. Face up paper  
output delivers paper with the printed side up out of the face up paper output. Select the area  
depending on your purpose by opening or closing the rear cover.  
Open the rear cover for face up paper output, or close the rear cover for face down paper output.  
4
IMPORTANT  
Do not open or close the rear cover while copying and printing.  
Paper Type and Paper Output Area  
Select the suitable paper output area depending on the paper type and your purpose.  
Paper Type  
Paper Output Area  
The Number of Output Sheets  
1 sheet  
face up  
Plain Paper L  
approx. 50 sheets  
(64 g/m )  
face down  
face up  
2
1 sheet  
Plain Paper  
approx. 50 sheets  
2
face down  
face up  
2
(64 g/m to 90 g/m )  
1 sheet  
Heavy Paper  
approx. 30 sheets  
(91 g/m to 105 g/m )  
face down  
face up  
2
2
1 sheet  
Heavy Paper H  
Transparencies  
approx. 30 sheets  
(106 g/m to 128 g/m )  
face down  
2
2
face up  
1 sheet  
face down  
approx. 10 sheets  
Selecting the Paper Output Area  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Face Down Paper Output Area  
The paper is delivered with the printed side down on the output tray.  
Paper is stacked in printed order.  
Close the rear cover.  
4
IMPORTANT  
Do not place the delivered paper back on the output tray. Doing so may result in paper jams.  
Do not place objects other than paper on the output tray. Doing so may result in paper jams.  
It is recommended to fold up the document feeder when printing many pages.  
Face Up Paper Output Area  
The paper is delivered with the printed side up out of the face up paper output on the back side of the  
machine. This way is convenient for printing on transparencies, envelopes, or labels which tend to curl,  
because the paper is delivered straight through out of the machine.  
Open the rear cover.  
Remove the delivered paper one by one.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not pull the paper forcibly.  
The machine has no face up output tray. Remove the delivered paper with your hand.  
Do not place an object in front of the face up paper output to prevent a paper jam.  
Selecting the Paper Output Area  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5
Speed Dialing  
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes how to register and use the speed dialing features of the machine.  
Speed Dialing Methods  
In addition to regular dialing, the machine provides several ways to dial fax/telephone numbers  
automatically.  
One-Touch Speed Dialing  
Dial a fax/telephone number by pressing the One-Touch Speed Dial button that the number is assigned to.  
Coded Speed Dialing  
Dial a fax/telephone number by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by a two-digit code (a three-digit code for the  
FAX-L390 model) assigned to that number.  
Group Dialing  
Send a document to a pre-defined group of fax numbers. (The numbers must already be stored as One-Touch  
Speed Dialing numbers or Coded Speed Dialing numbers.)  
Directory Dialing  
Dial a fax/telephone number by pressing [Directory] and entering the first letter of the other party’s name. In this  
manner you can search for the fax/telephone number registered for One-Touch Speed Dialing.  
The following pages describe how to register numbers for speed dialing. You will also find instructions  
for changing numbers and names registered under speed dialing buttons and codes, and how to use  
speed dialing.  
Speed Dialing Methods  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
One-Touch Speed Dialing  
Storing Numbers for One-Touch Speed Dialing  
Your machine can store up to 31 fax numbers under One-Touch Speed Dial buttons. Follow this  
procedure to store One-Touch Speed Dialing numbers and names.  
1
2
3
Press [Menu].  
5
Use [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <5.ADD. REGISTRATION> press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)], [ (+)], or the One-Touch Speed Dial button to select a One-Touch Speed Dial button under  
which you want to register a fax/telephone number between 01 and 31 press [OK] twice.  
If a number is already stored under the button you select, that number appears.  
If the button you select is registered for Group Dialing, <GROUP DIAL> appears.  
4
Use the numeric buttons to enter the telephone number (Max. 120 digits, including spaces and pauses) ➞  
press [OK] twice.  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
TEL=123xxxx  
:A  
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
Open the One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Space] to enter spaces between numbers (spaces are  
optional and are ignored during dialing).  
To enter a pause in the number, press [Redial/Pause] one or more times.  
5
6
Use the numeric buttons to enter the name you want to store (Max. 16 letters, including spaces) press  
[OK].  
For details on how to enter or delete letters, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
To continue registering numbers, repeat steps 3 to 5.  
-or-  
If you have finished registering numbers, press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
7
After you register a number for One-Touch Speed Dialing, it is recommended to write the name of the  
other party on a destination label and stick it on the One-Touch Speed Dial panel above the number of the  
One-Touch Speed Dial button where the number is registered.  
One-Touch Speed Dialing  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Changing or Deleting a Number/Name Stored Under a  
One-Touch Speed Dial Button  
Follow these steps if you want to change a number and/or name registered under a One-Touch Speed  
Dial button, or if you want to delete all information stored under a button.  
1
2
Follow steps 1 and 2 of “Storing Numbers for One-Touch Speed Dialing.(See p.5-2.)  
Use [ (-)], [ (+)], or the One-Touch Speed Dial button to select the One-Touch Speed Dial button you  
want to change or delete press [OK] twice.  
To delete a number:  
5
3
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Clear] to delete the number press [OK].  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
TEL=  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
When you delete a number, the name registered for that number is also deleted.  
4
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
To change the number and/or name:  
3
4
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Clear] to delete the previous entry.  
Press the numeric buttons to enter the new number press [OK] twice.  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
TEL=124xxxx  
:a  
Canon Europa  
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
If you want to delete a digit, press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to move the cursor under the digit you want to delete press  
[Delete].  
If you only want to change the name, press [OK] twice after step 2 open One-Touch Speed Dial panel go  
to step 5.  
If you want to keep the same name, go to step 7.  
5
Press [Clear] to delete the previous entry.  
One-Touch Speed Dialing  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
7
Press the numeric buttons to enter the new name press [OK].  
For details on how to enter or delete letters, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
To change additional numbers and/or names, repeat steps 2 to 6.  
-or-  
If you have finished changing numbers and/or names, press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Using One-Touch Speed Dialing  
Once you have registered your numbers under One-Touch Speed Dial buttons, you can use them to  
send documents as follows:  
1
Load the document in the ADF.  
5
For details on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and how to load documents, see  
“Document Requirements,on p. 6-1, and “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
2
3
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the fax resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on p. 6-4.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scan density. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 6-5.)  
4
Press the One-Touch Speed Dial button assigned to the number to which you wish to fax.  
TEL=  
123xxxx  
04 Canon U.K.  
The name registered under that One-Touch Speed Dial button is displayed. If no name is registered, the  
number registered under that button will be displayed.  
If you mistakenly press the wrong One-Touch Speed Dial button, press [Stop/Reset] press the correct button.  
If no fax number is assigned to the One-Touch Speed Dial button you press, the LCD displays <NOT  
REGISTERED>. If this happens, make sure you press the correct button and that the number you want to dial  
is registered under that button.  
5
Press [Start].  
If you do not press [Start] within 5 seconds of pressing the One-Touch Speed Dial button, the machine will  
begin sending automatically. If you do not want the machine to send automatically, you need to change the  
<TIME OUT> setting. See p.16-9 for more details.  
If an error occurs during sending, the machine will print an error report. If this happens, try sending the fax  
again. See “Faxing Problems,on p. 14-15 for details about errors.  
NOTE  
You can also use One-Touch Speed Dialing to send a document to more than one location at a time. For details,  
see “Group Dialing,on p. 5-9, and “Sequential Broadcasting,” on p. 6-13.  
5-4  
One-Touch Speed Dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Coded Speed Dialing  
Storing Numbers for Coded Speed Dialing  
You can store up to 100 numbers (169 numbers for the FAX-L390 model) for Coded Speed Dialing.  
Follow this procedure to store Coded Speed Dialing numbers and names.  
1
2
3
4
Press [Menu].  
5
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <5.ADD. REGISTRATION> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.CODED SPD DIAL> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select a two-digit code (00-99)* press [OK] twice.  
You can also select a code by pressing [Coded Dial] and entering the two-digit code* with the numeric buttons.  
If a number is already registered under the code you select, that number is displayed.  
If the code you select is registered for group dialing, <GROUP DIAL> appears.  
*Select or enter a three-digit code (000 to 168) for the FAX-L390 model.  
5
6
Use the numeric buttons to enter the telephone number (Max. 120 digits, including spaces and pauses) ➞  
press [OK] twice.  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
TEL=456xxxx  
:A  
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
Open the One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Space] to enter spaces between numbers (spaces are  
optional and are ignored during dialing).  
To enter a pause in the number, press [Redial/Pause] one or more times.  
Use the numeric buttons to enter the name you want to store (Max. 16 letters, including spaces) press  
[OK].  
FAX-L380S  
:A  
:A  
CODED SPD DIAL  
03=  
Canon OPTICS  
FAX-L390  
CODED SPD DIAL  
003=  
Canon OPTICS  
For details on how to enter or delete letters, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
7
To continue registering numbers, repeat steps 4 to 6.  
-or-  
If you have finished registering numbers, press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Coded Speed Dialing  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Changing or Deleting a Number/Name Stored under a  
Coded Speed Dialing Code  
Follow these steps if you want to change the number and/or name registered under a Coded Speed  
Dialing code, or if you want to delete all information stored under a code.  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Storing Numbers for Coded Speed Dialing.(See p.5-5.)  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the code (00-99)* you want to change or delete press [OK] twice.  
You can also select a code by pressing [Coded Dial] and entering the two-digit code* with the numeric buttons.  
*Select or enter a three-digit code (000 to 168) for the FAX-L390 model.  
To delete a number:  
5
3
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Clear] to delete the number press [OK].  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
TEL=  
CODED SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
When you delete a number, the name registered for that number is also deleted.  
4
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
To change the number and/or name:  
3
4
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Clear] to delete the previous entry.  
Press the numeric buttons to enter the new number press [OK] twice.  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
TEL=457xxxx  
:A  
Canon EUROPA  
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
If you want to delete a digit, press [W(-)] or [X(+)] to move the cursor under the digit you want to delete press  
[Delete].  
If you only want to change the name, press [OK] twice after step 2 open One-Touch Speed Dial panel go  
to step 5.  
If you want to keep the same name, go to step 7.  
5
Press [Clear] to delete the previous entry.  
5-6  
Coded Speed Dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
7
Press the numeric buttons to enter the new name press [OK].  
FAX-L380S  
:A  
:A  
CODED SPD DIAL  
03=  
Canon ITALIA  
FAX-L390  
CODED SPD DIAL  
003=  
Canon ITALIA  
For details on how to enter or delete letters, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
To change additional numbers and/or names, repeat steps 2 to 6.  
-or-  
If you have finished changing numbers and/or names, press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
5
Using Coded Speed Dialing  
Once you have registered your numbers under Coded Speed Dialing codes, you can send documents  
as follows:  
1
Load the document in the ADF.  
For details on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and how to load documents, see  
“Document Requirements,on p. 6-1, and “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
2
3
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the fax resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on p. 6-4.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scan density. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 6-5.)  
4
Press [Coded Dial] use the numeric buttons to enter the two-digit code* assigned to the number to  
which you wish to fax.  
*Enter a three-digit code for the FAX-L390 model.  
FAX-L380S  
TEL=  
TEL=  
04 Canon CANADA  
456xxxx  
456xxxx  
FAX-L390  
TEL=  
TEL=  
004 Canon CANADA  
The name registered under that Coded Speed Dialing code is displayed. If no name is registered, the number  
registered under that code will be displayed.  
If you mistakenly enter the wrong code, press [Stop/Reset] [Coded Dial] enter the correct code.  
If no fax number is assigned to the Coded Speed Dialing code you press, the LCD displays <NOT  
REGISTERED>. If this happens, make sure you enter the correct code and that the number you want to dial is  
registered under that code.  
Coded Speed Dialing  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
Press [Start].  
If you do not press [Start] within 5 seconds of entering the Coded Speed Dialing code, the machine will begin  
sending automatically. If you do not want the machine to send automatically, you need to change the <TIME  
OUT> setting. See p.16-9 for more details.  
If an error occurs during sending, the machine will print an error report. If this happens, try sending the fax  
again. See “Faxing Problems,on p. 14-15 for details about errors.  
NOTE  
You can also use Coded Speed Dialing to send a document to more than one location at a time. For details, see  
“Group Dialing,on p. 5-9, and “Sequential Broadcasting,” on p. 6-13.  
5
5-8  
Coded Speed Dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Dialing  
Group dialing allows you to store as many as 130 numbers (199 numbers for the FAX-L390 model)  
under One-Touch Speed Dial buttons or Coded Speed Dialing codes.  
Creating Groups for Group Dialing  
The numbers you register in a group must already be stored under One-Touch Speed Dial buttons or  
Coded Speed Dialing codes. Each group is stored under a One-Touch Speed Dial button or a Coded  
Speed Dialing code. Create groups for group dialing as follows:  
5
1
2
3
Press [Menu].  
Use [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <5.ADD REGISTRATION> press [OK].  
Use [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3.GROUP DIAL> press [OK].  
To register a group under a One-Touch Speed Dial button:  
4
Use [ (-)], [ (+)], or the One-Touch Speed Dial button to select an unused One-Touch Speed Dial button  
(01 to 31) press [OK] twice.  
If a group or number is already registered under the button you select, <GROUP DIAL> or <1-TOUCH SPD  
DIAL> is displayed.  
To register a group under a Coded Speed Dialing code:  
4
Press [Coded Dial] use the numeric buttons to enter an unused two-digit code (00-99)* press [OK]  
twice.  
*Enter a three-digit code (000 to 168) for the FAX-L390 model.  
FAX-L380S  
GROUP DIAL  
21=  
TEL=  
TEL=  
FAX-L390  
GROUP DIAL  
021=  
If a group or number is already registered under the code you select, <GROUP DIAL> or <CODED SPD DIAL>  
is displayed.  
To continue storing under a Coded Speed Dialing code, you can use [ (-)] or [ (+)] also.  
Group Dialing  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
NOTE  
Each One-Touch Speed Dial button or Coded Speed Dialing code can store either a name and number for speed  
dialing, or a group. Be careful not to override speed dialing numbers and names when creating groups.  
If you wish to register a group under a One-Touch Speed Dial button or Coded Speed Dialing code already  
registered for speed dialing, or if you want to re-enter a group, you must delete the previous information first. See  
p. 5-3 for more details.  
5
6
Select the speed dialing numbers you want to register in the group press [OK] twice.  
To enter in the group a number stored under a One-Touch Speed Dial button, press the desired One-Touch  
Speed Dial button(s).  
To enter a number stored under a Coded Speed Dialing code, press [Coded Dial] enter the two-digit code* for  
the number using the numeric buttons. For multiple entries, press [Coded Dial] between each entry.  
*Enter a three-digit code for the FAX-L390 model.  
NOTE  
You cannot register numbers in the groups that have not been registered for One-Touch or Coded Speed Dialing.  
You can review the numbers registered under the group by pressing [ (-)] or [ (+)].  
5
Enter the name using the numeric buttons for the group (Max. 16 letters, including spaces) press [OK].  
FAX-L380S  
:A  
:A  
GROUP DIAL  
22=  
UK GROUP  
FAX-L390  
GROUP DIAL  
022=  
UK GROUP  
For details on how to enter or delete letters, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
7
To enter additional groups, repeat steps 4 to 6.  
-or-  
If you have finished registering groups, press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Changing or Deleting a Number/Name Stored under a  
Group Dialing  
Follow these steps if you want to change or delete the number/name registered under a Group Dialing.  
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Creating Groups for Group Dialing” (See p. 5-9.)  
To delete a number and a name:  
2
3
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the number you want to delete press [OK] twice.  
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Clear] to delete the numbers registered under the group.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the numbers you want to delete.  
5-10  
Group Dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
6
Press [OK] twice.  
If you delete all the numbers registered under the group, press [Clear] to delete the name press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
To change the number and/or name:  
2
3
4
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the number you want to change press [OK] twice.  
Press [Clear] to delete the numbers registered under the group.  
Select the speed dialing numbers you want to register in the group press [OK] twice.  
To enter in the group a number stored under a One-Touch Speed Dial button, press the desired One-Touch  
Speed Dial button(s).  
5
To enter a number stored under a Coded Speed Dialing code, press [Coded Dial] enter the two-digit code* for  
the number using the numeric buttons. For multiple entries, press [Coded Dial] between each entry.  
*Enter a three-digit code for the FAX-L390 model.  
NOTE  
You cannot register numbers in the groups that have not been registered for One-Touch or Coded Speed Dialing.  
You can review the numbers registered under the group by pressing [ (-)] or [ (+)].  
5
6
Press [Clear] to delete the name.  
Press the numeric buttons to enter the new name press [OK].  
For details on how to enter or delete letters, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
7
To change additional groups, repeat steps 2 to 6.  
-or-  
If you have finished registering groups, press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Group Dialing  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Group Dialing  
To send a document to a group of numbers, follow these instructions.  
1
2
Load the document in the ADF.  
For details on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and how to load documents, see  
“Document Requirements,on p. 6-1, and “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
3
4
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the fax resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on p. 6-4.)  
5
Press [Exposure] to select the scan density. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 6-5.)  
Enter the group(s) stored under a One-Touch Speed Dial button(s) and/or Coded Speed Dialing code(s).  
FAX-L380S  
FAX-L390  
TEL=GROUP DIAL  
03 Canon GROUP  
TEL=GROUP DIAL  
03 Canon GROUP  
TEL=GROUP DIAL  
21 UK GROUP  
021 UK GROUP  
If you make a mistake when selecting a group, press [Stop/Reset] start again.  
The name registered under that One-Touch Speed Dial button or Coded Speed Dialing code is displayed.  
If you press a One-Touch Speed Dial button or Coded Speed Dialing code that has no group (or fax number)  
registered under it, the LCD displays <NOT REGISTERED>. Make sure you press the correct One-Touch  
Speed Dial button or enter the correct Coded Speed Dialing code, and that the group you want has been  
registered correctly under that button or code.  
After entering the first One-Touch Speed Dial button or Coded Speed Dialing code, you have 5 seconds to enter  
another speed dialing button or code before the machine begins sending automatically. If you have entered  
more than one speed dialing button or code, the machine waits for 10 seconds before it begins sending. If you  
do not want the machine to send automatically, you need to change the <TIME OUT> setting. See p.16-9 for  
more details.  
5
Press [Start].  
The machine then scans the document into memory, and begins dialing the numbers in the groups.  
5-12  
Group Dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Directory Dialing  
Directory dialing allows you to look up the other party’s name you registered and retrieve the number  
for dialing. This feature is convenient when you know the other party’s name but can not recall the  
One-Touch Speed Dial button, the code for Coded Speed Dialing, or Group Dialing where the number  
is registered.  
1
2
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
5
Press [Directory].  
:A  
_
<NOT REGISTERED> appears if there are no numbers registered, and the display returns to dial entry mode.  
3
4
Press a numeric button to enter the first letter of the name of the party you are searching for.  
For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter “H”, press [4 (GHI)] twice.  
Press [OK].  
Entries starting with the letter you entered are displayed.  
If there is no entry that starts with the letter you entered, entries that start with the next letter will be displayed.  
5
6
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display the other names.  
Pressing [ (+)] displays the names of other parties in alphabetical order.  
Pressing [ (-)] displays them in reverse order.  
When you reach the last name, the display returns to the first name.  
Press [OK].  
The other party’s fax number and name, or <GROUP DIAL> and the group’s name appear.  
Directory Dialing  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Sending Faxes  
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes how to use your machine to send faxes.  
Preparing to Send a Fax  
Document Requirements  
The documents you load into the machine must meet the following requirements.  
When loading a multi-page document:  
Size:  
Max.: 216 × 356 mm  
Min.: 148 × 105 mm  
(W × L)  
Up to 50 A4-size, 50 LTR-size, or 20 LGL-size sheets  
(1 sheet for sizes other than these)  
Quantity:  
0.07–0.13 mm  
(For sheets thicker than this, load 1 sheet at a time)  
Thickness:  
All sheets should be of the same thickness.  
2
Weight:  
50–105 g/m  
All sheets should be of the same weight.  
When loading a single-page document:  
Size:  
Max.: 216 mm × approx.1 m  
Min.: 148 × 105 mm  
1 sheet  
(W x L)  
Quantity  
Thickness  
Weight:  
0.06 – 0.23 mm  
2
50 – 240 g/m  
Preparing to Send a Fax  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Problem documents  
To prevent paper jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), do not use any of the following  
paper in the machine:  
WRINKLED OR  
CURLED OR  
TORN PAPER  
CREASED PAPER  
ROLLED PAPER  
CARBON PAPER OR  
CARBON-BACKED  
PAPER  
COATED PAPER  
ONION SKIN OR  
THIN PAPER  
6
Remove all staples, paper clips, or any other fasteners before loading the document into the  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).  
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading the  
document into the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).  
If you have a document that will not feed into the machine properly, make a photocopy of the  
document, then load the copy instead.  
Scanning Area  
The margins shown in the illustration below are outside the machine’s scanning area. Make sure your  
document’s text and graphics do not extend into these margins.  
A4  
6-2  
Preparing to Send a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Documents in the ADF  
1
Fan the edges that will feed into the machine first, then tap the edges of multiple page documents on a  
flat surface to even the stack.  
2
3
Adjust the document guides to the width of the document.  
6
Load the document in the ADF.  
The document is now ready for scanning.  
NOTE  
For multiple page documents, the pages are fed one by one from the top of the stack (from the first page).  
Wait until all pages of your document have been scanned before starting a new job.  
50 sheets of A4-size documents can be set in the ADF. If more than 50 sheets of A4-size documents are set in the  
ADF, paper jams may occur.  
Preparing to Send a Fax  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Trouble With Multipage Documents  
If you have any trouble in feeding a multipage document, do the following:  
1
Remove the stack and tap it on a flat surface to even the edges.  
2
Gently insert the stack into the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) until it stops.  
6
NOTE  
If you have further trouble with page jams while feeding, see “Removing Jammed Paper from the ADF,” on p. 14-7.  
Wait until all pages of your document have been scanned completely before starting a new job.  
Adjusting the Resolution and Contrast  
Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution)  
Canon’s Ultra High Quality (UHQ) imaging technology enables you to send faxes with a print quality  
that is very close to that of the original document. The machine also lets you adjust the resolution it  
uses in sending faxes to best suit your particular document.  
The machine has 5 resolution settings:  
<STANDARD> is adequate for most text documents.  
<FINE> is suitable for documents with fine print (smaller than the print in this sentence).  
<PHOTO> is for documents that contain photographs. With this setting, areas of the document that  
contain photos are automatically scanned with 256 levels of gray, rather than just two (black and  
white). This gives a much better reproduction of the photos, though transmission time is longer.  
<SUPER FINE> is for documents that contain fine print and images (much smaller than the print in  
this sentence), and its resolution is four times of <STANDARD>.  
<ULTRA FINE> is for documents that contain fine print and images (much smaller than the print in  
this sentence), and its resolution is eight times of <STANDARD>.  
NOTE  
Fax transmission time will vary depending on what resolution setting is set.  
6-4  
Preparing to Send a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Set the resolution as follows:  
1
2
3
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Press [Image Quality].  
The LCD display shows the current resolution setting.  
Press [Image Quality] repeatedly until the resolution you want is displayed press [OK].  
FAX RESOLUTION  
31/12 2005 SAT 10:00  
FaxOnly  
FINE  
FINE  
4
Continue the operation you wish to complete.  
If you do not proceed with any other operation, the LCD display returns to standby mode.  
6
Adjusting the Exposure (Density)  
You can adjust the lightness/darkness of the document pages before you scan for sending.  
You can select the scanning density from the following:  
<LIGHT> for documents with dark text or color.  
<STANDARD> for normal printed or written text.  
<DARK> for documents with light text or color.  
1
2
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Press [Exposure].  
The LCD display shows the current exposure setting.  
Preparing to Send a Fax  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Press [Exposure] repeatedly until the scanning density you want is displayed press [OK].  
DENSITY CONTROL  
31/12 2005 SAT 10:00  
FaxOnly  
DARK  
STANDARD  
Continue the operation you wish to complete.  
If you do not proceed with any other operation, the LCD display returns to standby mode.  
NOTE  
You can set the scanning density so that the desired scanning density such as STANDARD is automatically  
returned after the <AUTO CLEAR> function activates or documents are scanned. Since <SCAN DENSITY> of  
<FAX DEFAULT> is set to ‘OFF’ in the factory default setting, the scanning density set using [Exposure] will remain  
unchanged. (See Chapter 16, “The Menu System.)  
You can set the level of each scanning density (LIGHT/STANDARD/DARK) in the <DENSITY CONTROL> of the  
Menu. (See Chapter 16, “The Menu System.)  
Sending Methods  
6
Memory Sending  
To use memory sending, you load the document, dial the fax number press [Start]. See p. 6-8 for  
more details on memory sending.  
Since the machine is multitasking, you can even scan a document into the memory while sending a  
document, receiving a document, or printing a report.  
Manual Sending Via the Handset*  
Use manual sending via the handset if you want to speak with the other party before sending a fax to  
them. With manual sending via the handset, dial and converse normally, and when they are ready to  
receive your fax, press [Start] to begin sending. See p. 6-9 for more details on manual sending via the  
handset.  
For manual sending via the handset, you need to have the optional handset or a telephone connected  
to your machine.  
*
With optional handset or other telephone connected. This feature is available for certain countries only.  
6-6  
Preparing to Send a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dialing Methods  
There are several ways of dialing the number of the party you want to send to:  
Regular Dialing  
Use the numeric buttons to dial the recipient’s fax number.  
One-Touch Speed Dialing  
Press the One-Touch Speed Dial button (1 to 31) under which you have registered the number you want to send to.  
See Chapter 5, “Speed Dialing,” for details on registering and using One-Touch Speed Dialing.  
Coded Speed Dialing  
Press [Coded Dial] enter the two-digit code (00-99)* under which you have registered the number you want to  
send to. See Chapter 5, “Speed Dialing,” for details on registering and using Coded Speed Dialing.  
*Enter a three-digit code (000 to 168) for the FAX-L390 model.  
Group Dialing  
Send a document to a pre-defined group of fax numbers. (The numbers must already be stored as One-Touch  
Speed Dialing numbers or Coded Speed Dialing numbers.) See Chapter 5, “Speed Dialing,” for details on  
registering and using Group Dialing.  
6
Directory Dialing  
Press [Directory] enter the first letter of the other party’s name and retrieve the number for dialing. See Chapter 5,  
“Speed Dialing,” for details on how to use Directory Dialing.  
Preparing to Send a Fax  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Sending Documents  
This section describes the different ways to send faxes with the machine.  
Memory Sending  
You should normally use memory sending to send documents efficiently. If <MEMORY FULL> is  
displayed, the machine cannot scan the documents. In this case, wait for the machine to send any  
faxes stored in the memory, then scan the documents.  
NOTE  
You can register a new fax job while the machine is waiting to redial the other party’s number automatically. For  
details on how to set the machine to redial automatically, see “Automatic Redialing With Memory Sending,” on  
p. 6-11.  
6
Follow this procedure for memory sending:  
1
Load the document in the ADF.  
For details on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and how to load documents, see  
“Document Requirements,on p. 6-1, and “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
2
3
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the fax resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on p. 6-4.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scan density. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 6-5.)  
4
5
Dial the other party’s fax/telephone number.  
For details on the different dialing methods, see “Dialing Methods,on p. 6-7.  
Press [Start].  
NOTE  
To cancel memory sending, press [Stop/Reset]. (See Chapter 12, “System Monitor.)  
Sending Documents  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Manual Sending Via the Handset*  
Use manual sending when you want to talk to the other party before sending a document, or if the other  
party does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.  
NOTE  
You will need to connect a telephone to the machine if you want to talk to the other party before sending a  
document.  
*
With optional handset or other telephone connected. This feature is available for certain countries only.  
Follow this procedure for manual sending:  
1
Load the document in the ADF.  
For details on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and how to load documents, see  
“Document Requirements,on p. 6-1, and “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
6
2
3
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the fax resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on p. 6-4.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scan density. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 6-5.)  
4
5
Pick up the handset.  
Dial the other party’s fax/telephone number.  
For details on the different dialing methods, see “Dialing Methods,on p. 6-7.  
6
Talk through the handset to the other party.  
If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the other party’s voice, go to step 8.  
7
8
Ask the other party to set their fax machine to receive faxes.  
When you hear a high-pitched signal, press [Start] hang up the handset.  
NOTE  
To cancel manual sending, press [Stop/Reset].  
Sending Documents  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Canceling Sending  
Canceling Memory Sending  
While Documents Are Being Scanned Using the ADF  
1
2
Press [Stop/Reset].  
Scanning is canceled.  
Remove the document from the ADF.  
6
For details on how to remove documents, see “Removing Jammed Paper from the ADF,” on p. 14-7.  
After All Documents Are Scanned  
1
While documents are being sent, press [Stop/Reset].  
The machine asks you to confirm that you want to cancel.  
CANCEL DURING TX/RX?  
< YES  
NO >  
2
Press [ (-)] to cancel sending.  
If you change your mind and want to continue sending, press [ (+)] for <NO>.  
The machine prints an ERROR TX REPORT if a transmission report is set to print automatically. (See “1.TX  
REPORT,” on p. 16-7.)  
Canceling Sending  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Redialing  
Manual Redialing  
To redial the last number dialed with the numeric buttons, press [Redial/Pause].  
To cancel manual redialing, press [Stop/Reset] [ (-)].  
Automatic Redialing With Memory Sending  
With memory sending, you can set the machine to automatically dial the fax number again if the  
receiving fax machine does not answer or if the line is busy. You can also control how many times the  
machine will redial the number and how long it will wait between dialing attempts. See “Setting Up  
Automatic Redialing*,on p. 6-11.  
6
Canceling Automatic Redialing  
If you press [Stop/Reset] when waiting to redial, the LCD displays standby mode but you are still in  
automatic redialing. To cancel redialing while the machine is waiting to redial, follow the procedure  
described in “Deleting a Fax Job,on p. 12-2. To cancel while the machine is redialing, do the following:  
Wait until the machine begins redialing.  
Press [Stop/Reset] [ (-)].  
NOTE  
The machine can print a list of document stored in memory (DOCUMENT MEMORY LIST), along with the  
transaction number of each document. The document waiting to be sent using automatic redialing will be listed as  
<TRANSMIT>. To print the list, see “Document Memory List,on p. 13-14.  
Setting Up Automatic Redialing*  
You can set up the following options for automatic redialing:  
Whether or not the machine redials automatically  
The number of times the machine attempts redialing  
The time interval between redialing attempts  
*The default settings for the auto redial feature vary depending on the country. For details, see Appendix C,  
“Country-Specific Features.”  
Redialing  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Follow the procedure below to adjust the automatic redialing settings.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3.TX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3.AUTO REDIAL> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <ON> to enable automatic redialing or <OFF> to disable it press [OK].  
If you selected <ON>: Go to step 6.  
If you selected <OFF>: Go to step 8.  
AUTO REDIAL  
AUTO REDIAL  
1.REDIAL TIMES  
ON  
6
6
Press [OK] again use [ (-)], [ (+)], or the numeric buttons to enter the number of times you want the  
machine to redial press [OK] twice.  
REDIAL TIMES  
REDIAL INTERVAL  
02TIMES  
02MIN.  
7
8
Press [ (-)], [ (+)], or the numeric buttons to select the time interval between redialings press [OK].  
REDIAL INTERVAL  
02MIN.  
TX SETTINGS  
4.TIME OUT  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
6-12  
Redialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sequential Broadcasting  
Sending a Document to More Than One Destination  
The machine’s sequential broadcasting feature allows you to send a fax to a sequence of up to 141 fax  
numbers (210 fax numbers for the FAX-L390 model), using any combination of dialing methods as  
follows:  
One-Touch Speed Dialing: up to 31 destinations  
Coded Speed Dialing: up to 100 destinations (169 destinations for the FAX-L390 model)  
Regular dialing and redialing: 10 destinations  
(with the numeric buttons or [Redial/Pause])  
You can enter the One-Touch Speed Dialing and Coded Speed Dialing destinations in any order. You  
can also include one destination that you dial manually using the numeric buttons or [Redial/Pause].  
Be sure to press [OK] after your entry with the numeric keys.  
6
To send a fax to more than one location, do the following:  
1
Load the document in the ADF.  
For details on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and how to load documents, see  
“Document Requirements,on p. 6-1, and “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
2
3
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the fax resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on p. 6-4.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scan density. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 6-5.)  
Sequential Broadcasting  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Enter up to 141 destinations (210 destinations for the FAX-L390 model) using any of the following  
methods:  
One-Touch Speed Dialing:  
Press the desired One-Touch Speed Dial button(s).  
Coded Speed Dialing:  
Press [Coded Dial] enter the two-digit code (00-99)* using the numeric buttons.  
*Enter a three-digit code (000 to 168) for the FAX-L390 model.  
Be sure to press [Coded Dial] before each code.  
Directory Dialing:  
Press [Directory] enter the first letter of the name of the party you are searching for.  
Regular Dialing:  
Enter the number using the numeric buttons or [Redial/Pause].  
Be sure to press [OK] after your entry with the numeric keys.  
NOTE  
If you make a mistake on regular dialing, open One-Touch Speed Dial panel  
press [Delete] or [ (-)] to delete  
the last digit, or press [Clear] to delete an entire entry when you use the numeric buttons.  
After entering the first One-Touch Speed Dial button or Coded Speed Dialing code, you have 5 seconds to enter  
another speed dialing button or code before the machine begins sending automatically. If you have entered more  
than one speed dialing button or code, the machine waits for 10 seconds before it begins sending. If you do not  
want the machine to send automatically, you need to change the <TIME OUT> setting. See p. 16-9 for more  
details.  
6
If you want to review the numbers you entered, use the [ (-)] or [ (+)] to scroll through the numbers.  
5
Press [Start].  
The machine then scans the document into memory, and begins sending it to the destinations in numerical order,  
starting with the One-Touch Speed Dialing numbers, then the Coded Speed Dialing numbers, and finally the  
numbers dialed with the numeric buttons or [Redial/Pause].  
NOTE  
If the machine memory becomes full while scanning your document, <MEMORY FULL> appears in the LCD  
display. If this happens, remove the remainder of the document from the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).Then  
divide the document into several sections and send each section separately.  
Only one broadcasting job will be active at any given time.  
To cancel sending, press [Stop/Reset]  
follow the instructions in the LCD display. When you press [Stop/Reset],  
sending to all recipients will be canceled. You cannot cancel sending to only one recipient. (See Chapter 12,  
“System Monitor.)  
Sending a Document Using Group Dialing  
If you frequently send faxes to the same group of people, you can create a “group.Groups are stored  
under One-Touch Speed Dial buttons or Coded Speed Dialing codes. See Chapter 5, “Speed Dialing,”  
for details on registering numbers under groups and using Group Dialing.  
6-14  
Sequential Broadcasting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Delayed Sending  
Your machine allows you to scan a document into its memory and send it automatically at a preset  
time. By using this feature, you can take advantage of lower long distance rates at night, for example.  
You can set up to 141 destinations (210 destinations for the FAX-L390 model) and up to 20  
reservations for delayed sending.  
1
Load the document in the ADF.  
For details on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and how to load documents, see  
“Document Requirements,on p. 6-1, and “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
2
3
Press [FAX].  
6
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the fax resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on p. 6-4.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scan density. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 6-5.)  
4
5
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Delayed Transmission].  
Use the numeric buttons to enter the time at which you want to send the document press [OK].  
DELAYED TX  
TX TIME SETTNG 10:00  
TEL=  
Enter the time using the 24-hour clock system. Precede single digits with a zero.  
Example:  
9:30 a.m. = 09:30  
4:30 p.m. = 16:30  
Delayed Sending  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Enter the destination(s) using any of the following 4 methods.  
One-Touch Speed Dialing:  
Press the desired One-Touch Speed Dial button(s).  
Coded Speed Dialing:  
Press [Coded Dial] enter the two-digit code (00-99)* using the numeric buttons.  
*Enter a three-digit code (000 to 168) for the FAX-L390 model.  
Be sure to press [Coded Dial] before each code.  
Directory Dialing:  
Press [Directory] enter the first letter of the name of the party you are searching for.  
Regular Dialing:  
Enter the number using the numeric buttons or [Redial/Pause].  
You can enter 10 numbers.  
Be sure to press [OK] after your entry with the numeric buttons.  
NOTE  
If you make a mistake on regular dialing, open One-Touch Speed Dial panel  
press [Delete] or [ (-)] to delete  
the last digit, or press [Clear] to delete an entire entry when you use the numeric buttons.  
6
7
Press [Start].  
The machine scans the document into memory.  
NOTE  
If the machine memory becomes full while scanning your document, <MEMORY FULL> appears in the LCD  
display. If this happens, you cannot send the document at a delayed time.  
You can only register one preset sending operation at a time.  
The machine is a multitasking machine, so you can send, receive, print, and copy other documents even when you  
have set the machine for delayed sending.  
To print, copy, or send other documents after setting the machine for delayed sending, simply follow the  
procedures described in this User’s Guide.  
To cancel a delayed sending, see “Deleting a Fax Job,on p. 12-2.  
The machine can print a list of document stored in memory (DOCUMENT MEMORY LIST), along with the  
transaction number of each document. The document to be sent using delayed sending will be listed as  
<DELAYED TX> or <DEL SQ BDCST>. To print the list, see “Document Memory List,on p. 13-14.  
When the set time comes, the machine dials and sends the document.  
6-16  
Delayed Sending  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Receiving Faxes  
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes how to use your machine to receive faxes.  
Different Ways to Receive a Fax  
The machine provides you with 4 different modes for receiving faxes. To decide which mode will best  
suit your requirements, consider how you want to use the machine:  
Receive Mode  
Main Use  
Operation  
Requirements  
Answers all calls as fax calls. It  
receives faxes automatically and  
disconnects voice calls.  
Separate telephone line for fax use  
only.  
FaxOnly*  
Fax  
Automatically switches between fax  
calls and voice calls. Receives faxes  
automatically and rings for voice calls.  
To set the details see p. 7-2.  
FaxTel  
Fax/Tel  
Telephone connected to the machine.  
Telephone connected to the machine.  
Rings for every call, whether it is a fax  
call or a voice call. For a fax call, you  
have to manually activate reception of  
the fax.  
Manual  
Tel  
Receives faxes automatically and  
routes voice calls to the answering  
machine.  
Answering machine connected to the  
machine.  
AnsMode  
Fax/Tel  
*
Factory default setting  
You can confirm which receive mode is set by checking the standby display. The receive mode is  
displayed in the lower left of the LCD.  
Different Ways to Receive a Fax  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Setting the Receive Mode  
Set the machine receive mode as follows:  
1
2
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Receive Mode].  
The LCD display shows the current receive mode setting.  
If you want to change the receive mode, press [Receive Mode] repeatedly until the mode you want  
appears press [OK].  
Each time you press [Receive Mode], the receive mode changes in the following order:  
FaxOnly Manual AnsMode FaxTel FaxOnly …  
Receiving Faxes and Phone Calls Automatically:  
FaxTel Mode  
Set this mode if you want your machine to automatically switch between voice and fax calls.  
7
You can control precisely how your machine handles incoming calls by adjusting the settings below.  
Setting the Options for FaxTel Mode  
RING START TIME  
When a call comes in, the machine checks to see if it is a person wishing to speak to you or a fax machine trying to  
send a document. If your machine does not have enough time to detect the fax tone, it assumes the call is from a  
telephone. Use the <RING START TIME> setting to increase the time the machine takes to check whether a call is  
from a fax machine or a telephone. You can select a time between 0 and 30 seconds; the default is 8 seconds.  
F/T RING TIME  
When your machine is set to receive both fax and telephone calls automatically, the telephone rings to alert you to  
pick up the handset if the call is from a person. If you do not pick up the handset within a certain amount of time, the  
telephone stops ringing. Use this option to change the number of times the machine rings, from 10 to 60 seconds.  
The default is 22 seconds.  
F/T SWITCH ACTION  
Not all fax machines are capable of sending a fax tone (the CNG tone that warns the receiving fax machine that a  
fax is coming). For those cases the machine may think that the call coming in is a voice call and rings to alert you of  
the call (the amount of time it is going to ring is determined by the <F/T RING TIME> setting above). If you do not  
answer the call, one of two things can happen:  
1. If you set the <F/T SWITCH ACTION> to ‘RECEIVE’, the machine will switch to fax receive mode automatically at  
that point and start to receive the document. If no document comes in, it disconnects the call after approx. 40  
seconds. The factory default setting is ‘RECEIVE’.  
2. If you set the <F/T SWITCH ACTION> to ‘DISCONNECT’, the machine will disconnect the phone call  
immediately freeing up your phone line at this point.  
7-2  
Different Ways to Receive a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
What Happens When FaxTel Mode is Selected  
Type of call  
Telephone  
Fax  
Fax  
Sending document  
manually  
Sending document  
automatically  
Telephone charges  
begin for caller.  
The machine answers without ringing  
The machine listens for fax tone  
(For 8 sec.)  
Fax tone  
detected  
RING START TIME  
(Factory default  
setting=8 sec.)  
Document received  
automatically  
(Fax tone is detected  
and the machine  
switches to receive  
mode.)  
Fax tone is not detected  
Pick up the  
handset to talk  
The telephone starts ringing  
F/T RING TIME  
(Factory default  
setting = 22 sec.)  
If you donít pick up the handset  
(within 22 sec.)  
F/T SWITCH ACTION  
Choose between:  
DISCONNECT  
RECEIVE (factory default setting) and DISCONNECT  
The machine  
disconnects the call.  
7
RECEIVE  
(Factory default setting)  
Not all fax machines are capable of sending a fax  
tone. For those cases if you set the <F/T SWITCH  
ACTION> to RECEIVE, the machine switches to  
receive mode automatically and starts receiving  
the document. If no document comes in, it  
disconnects after approx. 40 seconds.  
Set the FaxTel Mode options as follows:  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.RX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.FAX/TEL OPT. SET> press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to set the time the machine waits before ringing when it receives a call press  
[OK] twice.  
RING START TIME  
F/T RING TIME  
08SEC  
022SEC  
You can use the numeric buttons instead of using [ (-)] or [ (+)] to set the time.  
Different Ways to Receive a Fax  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to set the time the machine rings while waiting for someone to pick up the handset  
press [OK] twice.  
F/T RING TIME  
F/T SWITCH ACTION  
030SEC  
RECEIVE  
You can use the numeric buttons instead of using [ (-)] or [ (+)] to set the time.  
7
8
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <RECEIVE> or <DISCONNECT> press [OK].  
F/T SWITCH ACTION  
DISCONNECT  
RX SETTINGS  
3.INCOMING RING  
This setting tells the machine what to do if no one picks up the handset within the specified ring time set in step 6.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
NOTE  
The default settings and selectable settings vary depending on the current country selection.  
Receiving Faxes Manually: Manual Mode  
7
To use this mode, you must have the optional handset or a telephone connected to the machine. In  
Manual Mode, the machine rings every time it receives a call, whether the call is from a telephone or a  
fax machine.  
NOTE  
Make sure the <REMOTE RX> setting in the <RX SETTINGS> menu is enabled. See p. 16-11 for details.  
If you use your machine with Manual Mode, answer incoming calls as follows:  
1
When the optional handset or the telephone rings, pick up the receiver.  
If you hear a person’s voice:  
Start your conversation. If the caller wants to send a document after talking to you, ask them to press the start  
button on their fax machine. When you hear a beep, press [Start] to begin receiving the document, then hang  
up.  
If you hear a slow beep or silence:  
A fax machine is trying to send you a document.  
Press [Start] on the machine, then hang up.  
-or-  
Enter the two-digit ID code from the telephone, then hang up.  
7-4  
Different Ways to Receive a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The machine then begins receiving the document. (This is particularly convenient if your telephone is located  
away from the machine.)  
If you do not hang up after pressing [Start] or the two-digit ID code, the machine beeps intermittently after you  
receive the document. (You can turn the beeping off by disabling the <OFFHOOK ALARM> in the <USER  
SETTINGS> menu. See p. 16-7 for details.)  
NOTE  
If you have an answering machine connected to your machine that can carry out remote-control operations  
(controlling your answering machine from a remote telephone), the security code for this function may be the same  
as the two-digit ID code described above. If so, make sure you change the machine two-digit ID code to make it  
distinct from the answering machine’s security code. See p. 16-11 for details on changing the code (<REMOTE RX  
ID> setting).  
Receiving Faxes Automatically: FaxOnly Mode  
When the machine is set up for a dedicated line, set FaxOnly Mode to automatically receive documents  
whenever a call comes over the fax line.  
The machine assumes all incoming calls are from fax machines sending documents. It receives the  
documents automatically and disconnects all voice calls.  
In FaxOnly Mode, you can control whether or not the machine rings when it receives a fax call. To set  
this option from the machine operation panel, see p. 16-10 (<INCOMING RING> setting).  
7
Using an Answering Machine: AnsMode  
Connecting an answering machine to the machine allows you to receive faxes and phone messages  
while you are out of the office.  
NOTE  
Canon does not recommend using an “answering service” (like those offered by local telephone companies that  
provide voice mail) on the telephone line you are connecting to the machine. If you do subscribe to an answering  
service, you may want to dedicate a separate line for fax communication only and connect that line to the machine.  
Using the Machine With an Answering Machine  
Follow these guidelines when using the machine with an answering machine:  
Set the answering machine to answer on the first or second ring.  
If the machine runs out of paper or toner in AnsMode, it receives all faxes into memory. The faxes  
then print automatically when you add paper or replace the toner cartridge.  
When recording the outgoing message on the answering machine:  
- The entire message must be no more than 15 seconds long.  
- In the message, tell your callers how to send a fax. For example:  
“Hello. I can’t answer the phone right now. If you would like to send a fax, press the start button on your  
fax machine. Thank you.”  
Different Ways to Receive a Fax  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Receiving Faxes in Memory When a Problem  
Occurs  
The machine will automatically receive incoming faxes into its memory if it encounters a problem that  
prevents it from printing normally. The LCD will display <RECEIVED IN MEMORY> and a message  
showing the problem. See below the error messages, their cause and the action you need to take to  
correct the problem.  
NOTE  
The machine memory can store up to approx. 510 A4-size pages  
Once the pages are printed, they are deleted from memory.  
If the memory becomes full, you will not be able to receive the remaining pages. Contact the other party and ask  
them to resend the remaining pages of the fax.  
*.  
If the machine receives a document into its memory, the LCD displays one of the following messages.  
These messages show the action you must take to correct the problem.  
Cause: The toner cartridge ran out of toner or is not installed properly.  
7
Action: Make sure the cartridge is installed properly, and install a new one if necessary. See  
“Installing/Replacing the Toner Cartridge,on p. 2-18.  
REPLACE CARTRIDGE  
Cause: The machine ran out of paper.  
Action: Add paper to the paper cassette/the multi-purpose feeder. See “Loading Recording Paper,on  
p. 2-21.  
SUPPLY REC. PAPER  
Cause: A paper jam occurred.  
Action: Clear the jam. See “Clearing Jams,on p. 14-1.  
OPEN PRINTER COVER  
REC. PAPER JAM  
Cause: Over capacity on the output tray.  
Action: Take out sheets from output tray and clear the paper jam. See “Clearing Jams,on p. 14-1.  
Once you have corrected the problem, the machine automatically prints the documents stored in  
memory.  
*
Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No.1, standard mode  
Receiving Faxes in Memory When a Problem Occurs  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Receiving While Performing Other Tasks  
Since the machine is a multitasking device, it can receive faxes and phone calls while you are entering  
your user information, making copies, or printing.  
If you receive a fax while you are making copies or printing, the machine stores the incoming fax in  
memory. Then, as soon as you finish making copies or printing, the machine automatically prints the  
fax. If you are entering registration information, the fax is printed as soon as it is received, and does not  
go into memory.  
Canceling an Incoming Fax  
To cancel an incoming fax, follow this procedure:  
1
2
Press [Stop/Reset].  
CANCEL DURING TX/RX?  
< YES  
NO >  
7
Press [ (-)] to [Stop/Reset] receiving, or [ (+)] to resume receiving the fax.  
Receiving Faxes in Memory When a Problem Occurs  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8
Setting Up and Using Polling  
CHAPTER  
This chapter shows you how to set up and use polling sending and receiving. Polling is useful when the sending party  
cannot be in the office at the same time.  
What’s Polling?  
Polling means a fax calls another fax and requests the other fax to send a document that it is holding.  
Unlike normal sending and receiving, in polling the receiver always calls the sender. This is called  
polling to receive a document. The sender sends the document in response to the polling by a  
telephone call from the receiver.  
NOTE  
Your fax can be set up to function in both roles. Your fax can poll to receive a document, or it can be polled to send  
a document that it is holding.  
Before You Use Polling Receiving  
Before you try to set up polling, note the following points:  
With one operation you can poll several faxes. You can dial up to 141 telephone numbers (210  
telephone numbers for the FAX-L390 model) and poll those faxes to receive documents that they are  
holding.  
If the other party is using a Canon fax machine which has the Polling ID function, ask them to set the  
Polling ID of their fax machine to 255 (1111 1111 binary number). For details on the Polling ID, see  
the other party’s fax machine manual. In all other cases the Polling ID is not a concern.  
What’s Polling?  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive  
Documents  
The machine polling feature allows you to request a document to be faxed to you from another fax  
machine. The sender only needs to make sure the document is on his fax machine and ready to be  
sent: when your machine polls that machine, the document is sent automatically. The machine can poll  
any fax machine that supports polling.  
Requesting Another Fax to Send a Document  
1
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
2
3
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Polling].  
Use [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.POLLING RX> press [OK].  
8
POLLING  
2.POLLING RX  
TEL=  
4
Enter the destination(s) using any of the following 4 methods.  
One-Touch Speed Dialing:  
Press the desired One-Touch Speed Dial button(s).  
Coded Speed Dialing:  
Press [Coded Dial] enter the two-digit code (00-99)* using the numeric buttons.  
*Enter a three-digit code (000 to 168) for the FAX-L390 model.  
Be sure to press [Coded Dial] before each code.  
Directory Dialing:  
Press [Directory] enter the first letter of the name of the party you are searching for.  
Regular Dialing:  
Enter the number using the numeric buttons or [Redial/Pause].  
You can enter 10 numbers.  
Be sure to press [OK] after your entry with the numeric buttons.  
NOTE  
If you make a mistake, open One-Touch Speed Dial panel  
[Delete] to delete the last number, or press [Clear] to  
delete all numbers you entered when you use the numeric buttons.  
5
Press [OK].  
Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive Documents  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting Up Polling Sending  
This section shows you how to set up your fax to store and hold a document until it is polled by another  
fax to send it.  
Setting Up a Polling Box  
Before you can use polling sending, you must create a polling box with the <POLLING BOX> of the  
Menu. The polling box holds the document in the memory until the other party prompts (polls) your fax  
to send the document, or until you delete the document (see p. 8-6).  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <6.POLLING BOX> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1.SETUP FILE> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1.FILE NAME> press [OK].  
8
Enter a file name for the polling box (up to 24 characters including spaces) using the numeric buttons ➞  
press [OK].  
:A  
SETUP FILE  
2.PASSWORD  
CANON TOKYO  
For details on how to enter or delete letters, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the LCD display for a few seconds.  
7
8
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.PASSWORD> press [OK].  
If you do not want to set a password, go to step 9.  
Enter a password (up to 7 digits) using the numeric buttons press [OK].  
PASSWORD  
SETUP FILE  
3.ERASE AFTER TX  
1234567  
Setting Up Polling Sending  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
NOTE  
This password protects your polling box settings from unauthorized access. To change these settings later, you will  
have to enter this password.  
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
9
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3.ERASE AFTER TX> press [OK].  
SETUP FILE  
3.ERASE AFTER TX  
ERASE AFTER TX  
ON  
10 Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <ON> or <OFF> press [OK].  
-
-
<ON>:The document in the polling box is erased after it is sent in response to a polling request from another  
fax machine.  
<OFF>:The document in the polling box is not erased after it is sent. Select this setting if you expect that the  
document will be polled by more than one fax machine.  
ERASE AFTER TX  
POLLING BOX  
2.CHANGE DATA  
OFF  
11 Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling  
Sending  
8
Follow this procedure to store a document in the polling box. The document remains in the polling box  
so that other fax machines can poll it. To use polling sending, you have to previously create a polling  
box.  
1
Load the document in the ADF.  
For details on the types of documents you can fax, their requirements, and how to load documents, see  
“Document Requirements,on p. 6-1, and “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
2
3
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the fax resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on p. 6-4.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scan density. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 6-5.)  
4
5
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Polling].  
Press [OK].  
The document is scanned into the polling box.  
8-4  
Setting Up Polling Sending  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Polling Box Settings  
Follow this procedure to change the settings of a polling box.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <6.POLLING BOX> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.CHANGE DATA> press [OK].  
Enter the password (up to 7 digits) using the numeric buttons press [OK].  
If you have not previously set a password, skip this step, and go to step 6.  
CHANGE DATA  
PASSWORD  
CHANGE DATA  
1.FILE NAME  
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,” on p. 3-1.  
8
6
7
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display the setting you want to change press [OK].  
To change the settings for an item, follow the same procedure you used for the initial setup of the polling box. (See  
“Setting Up a Polling Box,on p. 8-3.)  
NOTE  
To change the password, you have to first enter the old password (it is not displayed as you enter it)  
[OK] enter a new password (it is displayed as you enter it) press [OK].  
If you forget your password, your machine will require service to disable this feature.  
press  
When you are finished making changes, press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Setting Up Polling Sending  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Deleting a Polling Box  
Follow this procedure to cancel a polling box.  
NOTE  
You cannot cancel a polling box when the polling box is holding a document for polling sending.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <6.POLLING BOX> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3.DELETE FILE> press [OK].  
Enter the password (up to 7 digits) using the numeric buttons press [OK].  
If you have not previously set a password, skip this step, and go to step 6.  
DELETE FILE  
PASSWORD  
DELETE FILE  
FILE DELETED  
8
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
The polling box is deleted.  
NOTE  
If there is any document stored in the polling box, you cannot delete the polling box and the message <CANNOT  
DELETE> appears on the LCD display. If you want to delete the polling box, delete the document stored in the  
polling box first, then perform the procedure described above. For details on how to delete documents stored in  
memory, see “Deleting a Fax Job,” on p. 12-2.  
6
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
8-6  
Setting Up Polling Sending  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Restricting the Use of the  
Machine  
9
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes how to protect the machine from unauthorized access. Some of these features also enable  
you to keep track of fax transactions and copy (printing) based on division numbers that you can assign to individuals  
or sections inside your company.  
Setting and Using the System  
Administrator’s ID and Password  
The system administrator’s ID and password protect all the settings in the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.  
You need to enter the System Administrator’s ID and password when you are using Department ID  
management and want to operate the machine as the System Administrator. In this case, you do not  
need to enter the System Administrator’s password when accessing the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.  
Otherwise, you need to enter the System Administrator’s password every time you enter the SYSTEM  
SETTINGS menu.  
IMPORTANT  
If you fail to create and safeguard the System Administrator’s ID and password, anyone can open the System  
Settings menu and change or disable the settings.  
NOTE  
The user restrictions registered in your machine will be printed at the end of the USER’S DATA LIST. (See “User’s  
Data List,” on p. 13-11.)  
Setting and Using the System Administrator’s ID and Password  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the System Administrator’s ID and Password  
Follow this procedure to set the System Administrator’s ID and password.  
1
2
3
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <8.SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears press [OK] three times.  
Enter a System Administrator’s ID of up to seven digits (from 1 to 9999999) using the numeric keys ➞  
press [OK].  
SYS. ADMIN. ID  
1234567  
SYS. ADMIN. INFO  
2.SYSTEM PASSWORD  
4
5
Press [OK].  
Enter a System Administrator’s password of up to seven digits (from 1 to 9999999) using the numeric  
keys press [OK].  
SYSTEM PASSWORD  
9
6
Record the System Administrator’s ID and password, and store it in a safe location.  
NOTE  
You need to enter the System Administrator’s ID and password when you are using Department ID management  
and want to operate the machine as the System Administrator. In this case, you do not need to enter the System  
Administrator’s password when accessing the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu. Otherwise, you need to enter the  
System Administrator’s password every time you enter the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu.  
7
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Changing/Canceling the System Administrator’s ID and  
Password  
Follow this procedure to change or cancel the System Administrator’s ID and password.  
1
2
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <8.SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears press [OK].  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
PASSWORD  
_
9-2  
Setting and Using the System Administrator’s ID and Password  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
Enter the current System Administrator’s password using the numeric keys press [OK] three times.  
The password you entered is displayed with asteriscs.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
PASSWORD  
SYS. ADMIN. ID  
1234567  
The current password is displayed.  
4
5
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel.  
Press [Clear] to cancel or change the System Administrator’s ID.  
If you are canceling the System Administrator’s ID, press [OK] Proceed to step 7.  
SYS. ADMIN. INFO  
2.SYSTEM PASSWORD  
NOTE  
When you cancel the System Administrator’s ID, the system password is also canceled.  
6
7
Enter a new System Administrator’s ID and password of up to seven digits (from 1 to 9999999) using the  
numeric keys press [OK].  
For details about entering the System Administrator’s ID and password, refer to steps 5 to 7 of “Setting the  
System Administrator’s ID and Password,on p. 9-2.  
The new password is displayed as you enter it.  
9
SYSTEM PASSWORD  
7654321  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
2.DEPT.ID MANAGEMNT  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Setting and Using the System Administrator’s ID and Password  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department  
ID Management)  
This section describes how to restrict the operations of the machine. By storing a Department ID and  
Password for each department, you can set the machine so that its functions can be used only after the  
correct password has been entered. This is called “Department ID Management.Department IDs and  
Passwords can be stored. This function allows you to check the print totals and fax scan totals for each  
department, for management purposes.  
NOTE  
The user restrictions registered in your machine will be printed at the end of the USER’S DATA LIST. (See “User’s  
Data List,on p. 13-11.)  
Setting Operation Restrictions  
You can create up to 100 Department IDs and passwords to restrict sending operations on the  
machine. Follow this procedure to restrict the access to all of these features:  
Sending documents  
Copying documents, and manually printing fax reports and documents received/stored in memory  
9
1
2
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until the <8.SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears press [OK].  
The display for entering the System Administrator’s password appears if you set the Department ID management.  
(See “Setting and Using the System Administrator’s ID and Password,on p. 9-1.)  
NOTE  
If you forget your password, your machine will require service to disable this feature.  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department ID Management)  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
If the prompt <PASSWORD> is displayed, enter the System Administrator’s password using the numeric  
keys press [OK].  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
PASSWORD  
4
5
6
7
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <2.DEPT. ID MANAGEMNT> appears press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display <ON> press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the number to which the department will be designated press [OK].  
Enter the Department ID of up to seven digits using the numeric keys press [OK].  
DEPT. ID ENTRY  
1234567  
DEPT.ID SETUP  
1.PASSWORD  
NOTE  
You can set the Department ID from 1 to 9999999. If you set the Department ID as ‘111’, it will be shown as  
<0000111>. When you are requested to enter the Department ID, however, it is sufficient to enter ‘111’.  
You can delete the numbers you entered by pressing [Clear].  
8
9
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <1. PASSWORD> appears press [OK].  
9
Enter the password for the department of up to seven digits using the numeric keys press [OK].  
PASSWORD  
DEPT.ID SETUP  
2.COPY LIMITS  
1234567  
NOTE  
If you do not want to enter a password so you can use only the Department ID for transactions, just press [OK]  
proceed to the next step.  
If you set only the Department ID, you have to enter only the Department ID when you operate the machine.  
10  
11  
Press [OK] .  
Enter the maximum number of pages that can be copied or printed by the registered department using  
the numeric keys press [OK].  
COPY LIMITS  
100000  
NOTE  
You can set the copy limit from 0 to 999999.  
If you set the copy limit to 0, no copying operation can be performed by the department.  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department ID Management)  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
13  
If you want to set the transmission limits, press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <3. TX LIMITS> appears press  
[OK].  
Enter the maximum number of pages that can be sent by the registered department using the numeric  
keys press [OK].  
TX LIMITS  
100000  
NOTE  
You can set the TX limit from 0 to 999999.  
If you set the TX limit to 0, no transmission can be performed by the department.  
14  
15  
Repeat steps 7 to 12 to set restrictions for other Department IDs and passwords.  
When you are finished, press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
NOTE  
To operate the machine with restrictions ‘ON’, see “Operating the Machine with Restrictions ON,on p. 9-8.  
9
9-6  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department ID Management)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning Restrictions OFF or ON  
Follow this procedure to turn ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ the printing, copying and sending restrictions temporarily  
without changing the Department ID Management settings.  
1
2
3
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <8.SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears press [OK].  
If the prompt <PASSWORD> is displayed, enter the System Administrator’s password using the numeric  
keys press [OK].  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
PASSWORD  
4
5
6
7
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <2.DEPT. ID MANAGEMNT> appears press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display <ON> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <3.RESTRICTIONS> appears press [OK].  
9
Select the feature you want to turn ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’.  
To turn ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ restricted printing:  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <1. RESTRICT PRINTING> appears press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display <OFF> or <ON> press [OK].  
NOTE  
This setting turns ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ the restriction for printing fax reports and documents stored in memory, and  
copying function.  
To turn ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ restricted sending:  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <2.RESTRICT TX> appears press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display <OFF> or <ON> press [OK].  
8
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department ID Management)  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating the Machine with Restrictions ON  
This section describes how to operate the machine with the operation restriction features set up and  
turned ‘ON’.  
1
2
If you see the message <ENTER DEPT. ID> when the machine is in standby mode, the restriction is turned  
‘ON’. Enter the Department ID using the numeric keys press [OK].  
If the message <DEPT. ID PASSWORD> is displayed, enter the Department password using the numeric  
keys press [OK].  
DEPT.ID PASSWORD  
31/12 2005 SAT 15:11  
FaxOnly  
STANDARD  
3
Continue operating the machine.  
NOTE  
To return to standby mode with the message <ENTER DEPT. ID>, press [ID].  
9
9-8  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department ID Management)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Checking and Clearing the Counter Information  
This section describes how to check and clear the counter information for each department.  
1
2
3
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <8.SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears press [OK].  
If the prompt <PASSWORD> is displayed, enter the System Administrator’s password using the numeric  
keys press [OK].  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
PASSWORD  
4
5
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <2.DEPT. ID MANAGEMNT> appears press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display <ON> press [OK].  
DEPT.ID MANAGEMNT  
ON  
9
6
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <2.COUNT MANAGEMENT> appears press [OK] twice.  
To check the print counter:  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <1.PRINT COUNT> appears press [OK].  
Department ID  
PRINT COUNT 1111111  
000001/100000  
Number of  
Printed Pages  
Limit  
NOTE  
If you have not set the TX limit, nothing will be displayed as “Limit. (See “Setting Operation Restrictions,” on p.  
9-4.)  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to scroll through the Department IDs.  
To check the transmission counter:  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <2.SEND COUNT> appears press [OK].  
Department ID  
SEND COUNT 1111111  
000001/100000  
Number of  
Printed Pages  
Limit  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department ID Management)  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NOTE  
If you have not set the TX limit, nothing will be displayed as “Limit. (See “Setting Operation Restrictions,on p.  
9-4.)  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to scroll through the Department IDs.  
7
8
To reset the counter, press [Menu] twice press [ (-)] or [ (+)] until <2.COUNT RESET> appears ➞  
press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display <ON> or <OFF> press [OK].  
To reset the counter, select <1.ON>.  
If you do not want to reset the counter, select <OFF>.  
COUNT RESET  
1.ON  
9
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
9
9-10  
Restricting Machine Operation (Department ID Management)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Special Features  
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes the special features of the machine.  
Special Dialing  
This section explains special dialing features, such as dialing through a switchboard and dialing  
international numbers.  
Dialing Through a Switchboard  
A PBX (Private Branch Exchange) is an on-site telephone switchboard. If your machine is connected  
through a PBX or other telephone switching system, you have to dial the outside line access number  
first, and then dial the number of the party you are calling.  
You can register the type of access and the outside line access number under [R], so that you only have  
to press [R] before dialing the number you wish to reach. Follow the instructions below to register [R].  
Registering the Access Type and Outside Line Access Number  
Under the R button  
1
2
3
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK] twice.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <6.R-KEY SETTING> press [OK].  
Special Dialing  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4
5
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <PBX> press [OK].  
R-KEY SETTING  
PBX  
PBX  
HOOKING  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the access type of your switching system press [OK].  
If you selected <HOOKING>, go to step 8:  
If you selected <PREFIX>, go to step 6:  
6
7
Press the numeric buttons to enter the outside line access number.  
PREFIX  
123456  
For details on how to enter or delete numbers, see “Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols,on p. 3-1.  
Press [Redial/Pause] to enter a pause press [OK].  
PREFIX  
FAX SETTINGS  
2.REPORT SETTINGS  
123456P  
NOTE  
10  
If you select <PREFIX>, you can set a number up to 20 digits long, including the “P” at the end.  
8
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Dialing Long Distance  
When you register a long distance number, you may have to insert a pause either within or after the  
number. For long distance dialing, the location and length of the pause may differ depending on the  
telephone system.  
How to Enter Pauses  
Use this procedure to enter pauses within or at the end of numbers.  
1
During dialing registration, when you come to a step that asks you to enter a number for dialing, use the  
numeric buttons to enter the number.  
10-2  
Special Dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
To enter a pause within a number, press [Redial/Pause].  
To enter a pause at the end of a number, press [Redial/Pause] press [OK].  
A pause entered within a number (p) is 4 seconds long.  
If necessary, you can adjust the length of a pause within a number. See p. 16-8 (<PAUSE TIME> setting) for  
more details.  
To make a longer pause within a number, press [Redial/Pause] again. Each pause adds 2 seconds to the length  
of the pause.  
A pause at the end of a number (P) is fixed to 10 seconds.  
Using Tone Dialing On a Pulse Line  
Even if you have a pulse line, the machine enables you to use tone dialing once you have connected to  
the number you are calling. This allows you to take advantage of many services that require tones,  
such as selecting options from telephone “touch-line” services.  
1
2
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Lift the handset if you have installed the optional handset.  
-or-  
Press [Hook].  
The In Use/Memory indicator blinks green and you will hear the dial tone.  
10  
3
4
Dial the telephone number using the numeric buttons.  
The machine connects using the pulses required by your phone line.  
Press [  
] to switch to tone dialing.  
When [ ] is pressed, <T> is displayed in the LCD.  
Numbers entered after pressing [  
] will be dialed using tone dialing.  
5
When you have finished, hang up the handset.  
-or-  
Press [Hook].  
Special Dialing  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Restricting Use of the Machine  
If you do not want unauthorized people to be able to make calls, set the <LOCK PHONE> feature to  
‘ON’. Calls are restricted when you make calls using the handset or [Hook].  
Enabling Restriction of Your Machine  
Follow this procedure to enable restriction of your machine.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <7.SYSTEM SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3.LOCK PHONE> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <ON> press [OK].  
10  
LOCK PHONE  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
4.COUNTRY SELECT  
ON  
NOTE  
The display contents differ depending on the country.  
6
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Restriction of the machine is now enabled. No one can make calls. (This setting does not restrict incoming calls  
or faxes.)  
Restricting Use of the Machine  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Canceling Restriction of Your Machine  
Follow this procedure to cancel restriction of your machine.  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Enabling Restriction of Your Machine,on p. 10-4.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <OFF> press [OK].  
LOCK PHONE  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
4.COUNTRY SELECT  
OFF  
NOTE  
The display contents differ depending on the country.  
3
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Restriction of the machine is now disabled. Anyone can make calls.  
10  
Restricting Use of the Machine  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Memory Lock  
Normally, a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions when you  
want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print them. Locking the  
machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called “Memory Lock.”  
You may want to turn Memory Lock ‘ON’ when the machine is left unattended at night, or over long  
holidays, to prevent a large volume of printed documents from collecting in the paper output trays. After  
you return to the office, you can review the contents of the memory, and enter the memory lock  
password to print all of the documents stored in memory.  
Turning Memory Lock ON and Setting the Password  
After Memory Lock is turned ‘ON’, the machine automatically enters the Memory Lock mode. The  
documents received when the machine is in the Memory Lock mode are stored in memory until you  
unlock the memory with a password and print them.  
Follow this procedure to turn the Memory Lock ‘ON’, and define the password.  
10  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.FAX SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <7.SYSTEM SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1.MEMORY LOCK RX> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <ON> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display the desired Memory Lock setting press [OK].  
Using Memory Lock  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The MEMORY LOCK RX menu includes the following items:  
Setting  
Description  
1.MEM LOCK PASSWORD  
0 to 9999999  
This password protects the Memory Lock  
settings.  
Setting a password is recommended. You  
must use this password to unlock the  
memory so you can print documents stored  
in memory.  
Use the numeric buttons to enter a  
password (up to seven digits) press [OK].  
2.REPORT  
Sets the machine to print reports. This  
setting affects only reports that print  
automatically, such as an Activity Report.  
OUTPUT NO  
No report prints while in the Memory Lock  
mode.  
OUTPUT YES  
A report prints while the machine is in the  
Memory Lock mode.  
10  
The factory default setting is in bold face.  
7
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Turning Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents  
Follow this procedure to turn the Memory Lock ‘OFF’ and print the documents received in memory.  
1
2
When the Memory Lock mode is ‘ON’, the message <MEMORY LOCK RX> is displayed on the LCD.  
Follow the steps 1 to 5 of “Turning Memory Lock ON and Setting the Password” on p. 10-6 to turn the  
Memory Lock ‘OFF’.  
If you have not set the memory lock password (see step 6 in “Turning Memory Lock ON and Setting the  
Password” on p. 10-6), the LCD display shows <2.FAX DEFAULT>. The setting is completed and the documents  
received in memory are printed.  
3
If a memory lock password has been set, enter the memory lock password using the numeric keys ➞  
press [OK].  
When you press [OK], all the documents received in memory while the machine was in the Memory Lock mode  
are printed. The memory lock mode is deactivated.  
If you forget your password, your machine will require service to disable this feature.  
Using Memory Lock  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11  
Making Copies  
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes how to make copies with your machine.  
Making Copies  
One of the machine’s convenient features is its ability to make up to 99 high-quality copies of a  
document. To make copies, do the following:  
1
2
3
4
Load the document in the ADF.  
For details on how to place or load documents, see “Loading Documents in the ADF” on p. 6-3.  
Press [COPY].  
If you are already in the Copy standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Use the numeric buttons to enter the number of copies.  
You can set up to 99 copies.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the scanning resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on  
p.11-6.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scanning exposure. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p.11-6.)  
Press [Enlarge/Reduce] to select the copy ratio. (See “Setting Enlarging/Reducing,on p.11-4.)  
5
Press [Start].  
NOTE  
To cancel copying, press [Stop/Reset].  
Making Copies  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Specifying the Paper Size and Type  
(Common for Cassette and Multi-Purpose  
Feeder)  
NOTE  
When making copies on A4-size paper after having continuously copied on paper smaller than A4-size paper, the  
copies may be dirty. To prevent copies from being dirty, wait about 1 minute before making copies.  
The paper in the multi-purpose feeder is fed prior to the paper in the cassette.  
The settings changed in the Menu do not return automatically to the settings you set previously. Change to the  
previous settings again if necessary.  
When making copies of a small size or heavy paper*, etc., the copy speed may be slightly slower than usual.  
* The paper type should be selected in the Menu.  
If you intend to make a copy and print with a thermal transfer printer using the same sheet of paper, make the copy  
first. Failure to do so may make copies dirty or cause a paper jam.  
When copying onto transparencies, remove each transparency from the output tray as it is output.  
Specifying the Paper Size  
At the factory, the paper size has already been set to <A4>. Normally, you can make copies in this  
setting. When making copies on other sizes of paper, you need to specify the paper size according to  
the following.  
11  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1. PAPER SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1. CASSETTE> or <2. MP TRAY> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1. PAPER SIZE> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate paper size (A4, B5*, A5*, LTR, EXECUTIV* or ENVELOPE*  
for the paper cassette, A4, B5, A5, LTR, LGL, EXECUTIV, ENVELOPE or FREESIZE for the multi-purpose  
feeder) press [OK].  
*Only for the FAX-L380S model.  
When <ENVELOPE> is selected:  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate envelope type (DL, ISO-C5, COM10, or MONARCH) press  
[OK].  
Specifying the Paper Size and Type (Common for Cassette and Multi-Purpose Feeder)  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
When <FREE SIZE> is selected:  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <VERTICAL SIZE> or <HORIZONTAL SIZE> press [OK].  
Use the numeric buttons, or press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to specify vertical and horizontal sizes of the paper in  
millimeters (mm).  
Available setting range in <VERTICAL SIZE>: 127 mm to 356 mm  
Available setting range in <HORIZONTAL SIZE>: 76 mm to 216 mm  
Press [OK].  
Repeat the steps above to specify both vertical and horizontal sizes of the paper.  
6
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Specifying the Paper Type  
<PLAIN PAPER> is selected as the default paper type. When making copies on paper other than plain  
paper, you can specify the paper type according to the following. Specifying the paper type can prevent  
poor copy quality, or the printout not being printed correctly.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1. PAPER SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1. CASSETTE> or <2. MP TRAY> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2. PAPER TYPE> press [OK].  
11  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the appropriate paper type (PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY  
PAPER*, HEAVY PAPER H*, or TRANSPARENCY*) press [OK].  
For the FAX L390 model, * marked paper types are available only for the multi-purpose feeder.  
6
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
Specifying the Paper Size and Type (Common for Cassette and Multi-Purpose Feeder)  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Enlarging/Reducing  
You can enlarge or reduce the copy size using preset copy ratios or using custom copy ratios.  
Enlarging/Reducing Using Preset Copy Ratios  
1
2
Press [COPY].  
If you are already in the Copy standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Press [Enlarge/Reduce].  
PRESET RATIO  
-
100%  
+
3
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the copy ratio press [OK].  
PRESET RATIO  
70% A4A5  
70%  
A4  
TEXT  
-
+
01  
You can select from the following:  
11  
-
-
-
-
-
200% MAX.  
141% A5 A4  
100%  
70% A4 A5  
50% MIN.  
NOTE  
If the <PAPER SIZE GROUP> setting of <COPY SETTINGS> menu in the Menu is set to ‘INCH’ or ‘AB’, the  
preset copy ratios will be as follows:  
INCH: 50%, 64%, 78%, 100%, 129% and 200%;  
AB: 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 141% and 200%.  
To reset the copy ratio, press [Enlarge/Reduce] several times to display <DIRECT 100%> ratio  
press [OK].  
Setting Enlarging/Reducing  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Enlarging/Reducing Using Custom Copy Ratios  
1
2
Press [COPY].  
If you are already in the Copy standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Press [Enlarge/Reduce] twice.  
ZOOM 50-200%  
-
100%  
+
3
Use the numeric buttons to enter the copy ratio press [OK].  
ZOOM 50-200%  
80%  
80%  
A4  
TEXT  
-
+
01  
You can enter the copy ratio from 50% to 200%, selectable in 1% increments.  
Even after entering the copy ratio, you can use [ (-)] or [ (+)] to adjust the copy ratio. To increase the copy  
ratio, press [ (+)]. To decrease the copy ratio, press [ (-)].  
NOTE  
To reset the copy ratio, press [Enlarge/Reduce] several times to display <DIRECT 100%> ratio  
press [OK].  
11  
Setting Enlarging/Reducing  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Improving Copied Image  
Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution)  
You can adjust image quality to the appropriate level best suited for a document with text or photos.  
3 modes are available for adjusting the image quality.  
1
2
Press [COPY].  
If you are already in the Copy standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Press [Image Quality] repeatedly until the image quality you want appears.  
You can select from the following:  
-
-
-
<TEXT> for text-only documents  
<TEXT/PHOTO> for documents with text and photographs  
<PHOTO> for photographs  
NOTE  
Copy exposure automatically changes to manual mode when <TEXT/PHOTO> or <PHOTO> is set.  
11  
Adjusting the Exposure (Density)  
You can adjust the copy exposure automatically or manually according to how light or dark your  
document is.  
Adjusting Automatically  
1
2
Press [COPY].  
If you are already in the Copy standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Press [Exposure] to select the auto mode press [OK].  
DENSITY  
AUTO EXPOSURE  
100%  
A
A4  
TEXT  
01  
The copy exposure is adjusted automatically.  
NOTE  
Image quality mode automatically changes to <TEXT> when <AUTO EXPOSURE> is set.  
Improving Copied Image  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Adjusting Manually  
1
Press [COPY].  
If you are already in the Copy standby mode, you can skip this step.  
2
3
Press [Exposure] twice to select the manual mode.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to adjust the copy exposure press [OK].  
For a lighter copy exposure, press [ (-)].  
For a darker copy exposure, press [ (+)].  
DENSITY  
-LT  
100%  
A4  
TEXT  
DK+  
01  
NOTE  
When setting the exposure lighter, the indicator moves to the left. When setting the exposure darker, the indicator  
moves to the right.  
11  
Improving Copied Image  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Special Features  
The machine can perform the Collate Copy and Reserve Copy.  
Collate Copy  
The collate copy allows you to sort copies in page order. It is convenient when you make multiple  
copies of multiple page documents. To use this feature, you need to set <AUTO SORT> to ‘ON’ in the  
<COPY SETTINGS> menu. (See p. 16-5.)  
Copy 1  
Copy 2  
Copy 3  
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
Set 3  
sets of copies  
Follow the procedure below to set the Collate Copy function to ‘ON’:  
11  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3.COPY SETTINGS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <5.AUTO SORT> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <ON> press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to standby mode.  
The Collate Copy function is set to ‘ON.’ To perform copying, follow the procedure described in “Making Copies,”  
on p. 11-1.  
Special Features  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Reserve Copy  
This feature allows you to reserve the next job while the machine is printing out a current job.  
1
2
3
Load the document to be reserved in the ADF.  
For details on how to load documents, see “Loading Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.  
Use the numeric buttons to enter the number of copies.  
You can set up to 99 copies.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your document.  
Press [Image Quality] to select the scanning resolution. (See “Adjusting the Image Quality (Resolution),on  
p.11-6.)  
Press [Exposure] to select the scanning exposure. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 11-6.)  
Press [Enlarge/Reduce] to select the copy ratio. (See “Setting Enlarging/Reducing,on p. 11-4.)  
4
Press [Start].  
The machine begins scanning.  
NOTE  
After printing of the current copy job is complete, the next copy job begins.  
If the memory becomes full while scanning, <MEMORY FULL> appears in the LCD. When the ADF is used for  
scanning, the document being scanned stops in the ADF.  
All of the scanned documents will be erased if <MEMORY FULL> appears, so divide the document and copy each  
part separately, or select a lower image quality mode and make copies again.  
If the available memory decreases, <PLEASE WAIT> and <MAKING SPACE IN MEM> are displayed alternatively.  
If memory space becomes available, the scanning begins again automatically. Also, check that the cassette is not  
empty.  
11  
Special Features  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Confirming the Copy Job You Reserved  
1
Press [Stop/Reset] while the machine is printing out.  
SELECT JOB TO CANCEL  
0044  
02 30  
NO. OF COPY  
NO. OF DOCUMENT  
RESERVATION NO.  
PRINTING  
BLANK: WAITING  
NO PAPER, PAPER JAM, ETC.  
:
:
2
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to confirm the reservation number and number of documents.  
NOTE  
To finish confirming, press [Stop/Reset].  
Deleting the Copy Job You Reserved  
1
2
Press [Stop/Reset] while the machine is printing out.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to display the job to be deleted press [OK].  
SELECT JOB TO CANCEL  
0045  
CANCEL COPYING?  
< YES NO >  
01 20  
11  
3
Press [ (-)] for <YES>.  
The reserved copy job is deleted.  
NOTE  
To cancel deleting the copy job, press [ (+)] for <NO>.  
Once the copy job is deleted, the job can not be restored.  
Special Features  
11-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12  
System Monitor  
CHAPTER  
Checking the Status of Copy, Fax, Print and  
Report Jobs  
Use [System Monitor] to confirm and delete the jobs.  
When using [System Monitor], the LCD displays the jobs in the following order in each mode.  
In Copy mode,  
In Fax mode,  
- COPY STATUS  
- FAX MONITOR  
- PRINT STATUS  
- REPORT STATUS  
- FAX MONITOR  
- COPY STATUS  
- PRINT STATUS  
- REPORT STATUS  
Confirming Transmission Status  
Follow the procedure below to confirm the sending or receiving status.  
1
Press [System Monitor] repeatedly until <FAX MONITOR> is displayed press [OK].  
FAX MONITOR  
1.RX/TX STATUS  
16:50 0056 TX  
123xxxx  
NOTE  
To return to standby mode, press [Stop/Reset].  
If you perform the procedure above when the machine is not sending or receiving faxes, <NO CURRENT RX/TX  
JOB> appears, and the display returns to the display shown in step 1.  
The transaction number and <TX/RX> in the LCD mean the following:  
-
<0001> to <4999>: A sent document (TX)  
-
<5001> to <9999>: A received document (RX)  
Checking the Status of Copy, Fax, Print and Report Jobs  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Confirming Transmission Results and Sending Reservation  
Follow the procedure below to confirm the sending or receiving results and sending reservation  
(automatic redialing and delayed sending).  
1
2
Press [System Monitor] repeatedly until <FAX MONITOR> is displayed.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.TX/RX RESULT> press [OK].  
The sending result and reservation can be confirmed by checking the sending time, <TX/RX NO.> or fax number.  
3
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to confirm the sending result and reservation.  
15:34 0010 TX STNDBY  
[
01]CANON USA  
NOTE  
To return to standby mode, press [Stop/Reset].  
If you perform the procedure above when there is no sending reservation and transmission jobs, <NO DOC.  
STORED> will appear, and the display will return to the display shown in step 2.  
Deleting a Fax Job  
Follow the procedure below to delete the documents waiting to be sent by automatic redialing or  
delayed sending.  
12  
1
2
3
Press [System Monitor] repeatedly until <FAX MONITOR> is displayed.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3.DELETE DOCUMENT> press [OK].  
Use the numeric buttons to enter the transmission number of the fax job you want to delete press [OK].  
OK TO DELETE?  
< YES  
TX RX NO.  
0055  
NO >  
NOTE  
You can check the transmission number of the reserved fax job by printing the DOCUMENT MEMORY LIST. (See  
p. 13-14.)  
4
If you want to delete the fax job, press [ (-)] for <YES>.  
If you change your mind and do not want to delete the fax job, press [ (+)] for <NO>.  
Checking the Status of Copy, Fax, Print and Report Jobs  
12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Confirming and Deleting a Copy Job  
1
2
3
4
Press [System Monitor] repeatedly until <COPY STATUS> is displayed.  
NOTE  
If there is no job, <NO COPY JOBS EXIST> is displayed.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to confirm the job number, and the quantity of copies.  
COPY STATUS  
0003  
03 02  
If you want to delete the copy job, press [OK].  
CANCEL COPYING?  
< YES  
NO >  
If you decide to delete the job, press [ (-)] for <YES>.  
NOTE  
To cancel deleting the job, press [ (+)] for <NO>.  
Once the job is deleted, the job cannot be restored.  
Confirming and Deleting a Print Job  
12  
1
Press [System Monitor] three times.  
NOTE  
If there is no job, <NO PRINT JOBS EXIST> is displayed.  
2
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to confirm the file name.  
PRINT STATUS  
-------------  
FILE NAME  
3
If you want to delete the print job, press [OK].  
CANCEL PRINTING?  
< YES  
NO >  
Checking the Status of Copy, Fax, Print and Report Jobs  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
If you decide to delete the print job, press [ (-)] for <YES>.  
NOTE  
To cancel deleting the job, press [ (+)] for <NO>. Once the job is deleted, the job cannot be restored.  
The LCD can display characters in ASCII cord. Using characters other than those in ASCII cord may have the LCD  
display garbled characters.  
Confirming and Deleting a Report Job  
1
Press [System Monitor] four times.  
NOTE  
If there is no job, <NO REPORT JOBS EXIST> is displayed.  
2
If there is one report job and if you want to delete it, press [OK].  
CANCEL REPORT?  
< YES  
NO >  
3
4
If you decide to delete the job, press [ (-)] for <YES>.  
If there are multiple report jobs, press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the job you want to delete.  
REPORT STATUS  
02 USER DATA LIST  
12  
5
6
Press [OK].  
CANCEL REPORT?  
< YES  
NO >  
If you decide to delete the job, press [ (-)] for <YES>.  
NOTE  
To cancel deleting the job, press [ (+)] for <NO>. Once the job is deleted, the job cannot be restored.  
Checking the Status of Copy, Fax, Print and Report Jobs  
12-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13  
Reports and Lists  
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes how to print reports and lists.  
Activity Report  
The Activity Report is printed out automatically by the machine after every 20 transactions. This report  
lists the details of the documents you have sent or received so that you can keep track of the  
transaction operations your machine has performed.  
Machine prints sending and receiving transactions together in the same report.  
When sending a document to many locations (Broadcast), the transaction number will be the same  
for each transmission in the group.  
You can also print the Activity Report manually if you want to check the report before the 20  
transactions are completed. Follow this procedure to print the Activity Report.  
1
2
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Report].  
REPORT  
1.ACTIVITY REPORT  
3
Press [OK].  
The machine prints the ACTIVITY REPORT and the LCD returns to standby mode.  
31/12 2005 09:58 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
ACTIVITY REPORT  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
ST. TIME  
DESTINATION TEL/ID  
732 2233  
NO  
.
MODE  
PGS  
.
RESULT  
12/31 08:28 ADAM BOOK.CPA  
12/31 08:49 BELZER.INC.  
0007 TRANSMIT  
ECM  
ECM  
1
1
OK  
NG  
1
00'06  
00'20  
STOP  
1
213 978 3314  
5005 AUTO RX  
0008 TRANSMIT  
0009 TRANSMIT  
12/31 09:08 R.LOUIS  
1
213 978 3314  
2
1
NG  
0
OK  
00'00  
#0995  
00'18  
ERROR CODE  
12/31 09:34 ADAM BOOK.CPA  
732 2233  
3333  
TRANSACTION NUMBER  
IF MARKED WITH AN  
IT ALREADY HAS BEEN PRINTED OUT.  
Activity Report  
13-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Department ID Report  
If you set up Department ID Management, and the activity report feature is turned ON, transactions are  
listed by department in the Department ID report shown below. (See Chapter 9, “Restricting the Use of  
the Machine.)  
31/12 2005 09:58 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
ACTIVITY REPORT  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
DEPT. ID  
:
0001111  
DESTINATION TEL/ID  
732 2233  
213 978 3314  
DEPARTMENT ID  
ST. TIME  
NO  
0007 TRANSMIT  
5005 AUTO RX  
.
MODE  
PGS  
.
RESULT  
31/12 08:28 ADAM BOOK.CPA  
31/12 08:49 BELZER.INC.  
ECM  
ECM  
1
1
OK  
NG  
00'06  
00'20  
STOP  
1
1
DEPT. ID  
:
0002222  
DESTINATION TEL/ID  
213 978 3314  
ST. TIME  
NO  
.
MODE  
PGS  
PGS  
.
RESULT  
NG 00'00  
#995  
31/12 09:08 R.LOUIS  
1
0008 TRANSMIT  
2
0
ERROR CODE  
DEPT. ID  
ST. TIME  
:
0000000  
DESTINATION TEL/ID  
NO  
.
MODE  
.
RESULT  
OK 00'18  
31/12 09:34 ADAM BOOK.CPA  
732 2233  
0009 TRANSMIT  
1
IF MARKED WITH AN  
TRANSACTION NUMBER  
IT ALREADY HAS BEEN PRINTED OUT.  
THE TRANSACTION MADE WHILE DEPARTMENT ID  
MANAGEMENT IS OFF IS DEVIDED INTO DEPT. ID:0000000  
13  
Activity Report  
13-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transmission (TX) Reports  
The machine normally prints a report only when an error occurs during sending (ERROR TX  
REPORT). However, you can set the machine to print a report every time you send a document (TX  
REPORT).  
If you send a document using memory, you can also select whether the first page of the document is  
printed with the report. See “1.TX REPORT” in the <REPORT SETTINGS> menu on p. 16-7 for details  
on setting these options.  
ST. TIME  
Represents the time the last attempt was made to transmit a document.  
TIME USE  
Represents the amount of time it took during the last attempt to transmit. Please note that  
the usage time does not reflect the total usage time used to transmit all pages of the  
document when “retry” occurs. By printing an ACTIVITY REPORT and matching the  
transaction number of the TX REPORT with a transaction number in the ACTIVITY  
REPORT you can find out exactly how many attempts were made to send the document,  
how many pages were sent in each attempt as well as the usage time for each attempt.  
PAGES SENT  
RESULT  
Represents the number of pages that were successfully transmitted.  
OK means that all pages were transmitted either during the first attempt or after the first  
or second retry.  
NG means that either some or no pages were transmitted after 2 retries.  
Error TX Report  
13  
31/12 2005 10:32 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
ERROR TX REPORT  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED  
TX/RX NO  
DEPT. ID  
0006  
000111  
DESTINATION TEL  
DESTINATION ID  
ST. TIME  
TIME USE  
PAGES SENT  
RESULT  
#
1
213 978 3314  
JOHN BARRISTER  
31/12 10:30  
00’00  
0
NG  
STOP  
DEPT ID is listed only while the department ID management is ON.  
Transmission (TX) Reports  
13-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TX Report  
31/12 2005 09:49 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
TX REPORT  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
TRANSMISSION OK  
TX/RX NO  
DEPT. ID  
DESTINATION TEL  
DESTINATION ID  
ST. TIME  
0006  
0001111  
20 545 8545  
JOHN BARRISTER  
31/12 09:48  
00’16  
#
TIME USE  
PAGES SENT  
RESULT  
1
OK  
WHEN YOU  
SET THE FAX  
TO PRINT  
THE FIRST  
PAGE OF THE  
DOCUMENT  
THE SLEREXE COMPANY LIMITED  
SAPORS LANE•BOOLE•DORSET•BH25 8ER  
TELEPHONE BOOLE (945 13) 51617  
FAX 123456  
Our Ref. 350/PJC/EAC  
December 27, 2005  
Dr. P. N. Cundall,  
Mining Surveys Ltd.,  
Holroyd Road,  
Reading,  
Berks.  
DEPT ID is listed only while the department ID management is ON.  
Multi TX/RX Report  
13  
If you used sequential broadcasting to send a document, the MULTI TX/RX REPORT is printed.  
31/12 2005 09:58 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
MULTI TX/RX REPORT  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
TX/RX NO  
PGS.  
DEPT. ID  
0013  
1
0001111  
TX/RX INCOMPLETE  
_____  
TRANSACTION OK  
[
[
01]732 2233  
03]1 914 438 3619  
JOHN BARRISTER  
SEYMOUR GREEN  
ERROR INFORMATION  
_____  
If you set your machine to print activity reports (TX REPORT or RX REPORT) and then use sequential  
broadcasting or polling reception with multiple parties, multi-activity report will be printed instead of the  
activity report (Sending or Receiving). See <REPORT SETTINGS>, on p. 16-7.  
DEPT ID is listed only while the department ID management is ON.  
Transmission (TX) Reports  
13-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Reception (RX) Report  
Normally the machine does not print a reception report (RX REPORT) unless you set it to do so.  
You can set the machine to print the RX REPORT every time you receive a document or only if an error  
occurs during receiving. See p. 16-8 for details on setting this option.  
31/12 2005 09:58 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
RX REPORT  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
RECEPTION OK  
TX/RX NO  
DESTINATION TEL  
DESTINATION ID  
ST. TIME  
TIME USE  
PGS.  
5008  
#
1
213 978 3314  
31/12 09:07  
00’17  
1
RESULT  
OK  
13  
Reception (RX) Report  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Memory Clear Report  
If you experience a power failure, all documents stored in memory can be saved for up to approx. 1  
hour. If power is not restored to the fax within 1 hour, the documents in memory will be lost. If this time  
limit has elapsed before power is restored to the fax, as soon as power is restored a list of documents  
deleted from the memory as a result of the power failure is printed automatically.  
31/12 2005 10:32 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
MEMORY CLEAR REPORT  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
MEMORY FILES DELETED  
TX/RX NO  
MODE  
DESTINATION TEL/ID  
PGS.  
SET TIME  
ST. TIME  
0001  
0002  
DELAYED TX  
TRANSMIT  
[
[
01] ADAM BOOKS.CPA  
02] JOHN BARRISTER  
1
3
30/12 10:07  
30/12 10:26  
23:30  
NOTE  
If there are one or more documents in the image memory when the power is cut off, the machine will print the  
Memory Clear Report when the power is restored unless the machine is running out of paper or toner.  
13  
Memory Clear Report  
13-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Speed Dialing Lists  
Your machine can print speed dialing lists. These lists allow you to review the numbers and names  
registered under One-Touch Speed Dial buttons and Coded Speed Dialing codes (including Group  
Dialing numbers).  
Follow this procedure to print the lists.  
1
2
3
4
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <9.PRINT LISTS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <2.SPEED DIAL LIST> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the list you want to print press [OK].  
You can select from the following:  
-
-
-
<1-TOUCH LIST>  
<CODED DIAL LIST>  
<GROUP DIAL LIST>  
If you selected <1-TOUCH LIST> or <CODED DIAL LIST>, press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <SORT> or <NO  
SORT> depending on what order you want the destinations to be printed:  
Select <1.NO SORT> to print the list in key number order press [OK].  
-or-  
13  
Select <2.SORT> to print the list with the names of the destinations in alphabetical order press [OK].  
The machine prints the list and the LCD returns to standby mode.  
NOTE  
You can also print the list using [Report]. Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel  
press [Report]  
select <2.  
SPEED DIAL LIST> press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select a report you want to print out  
press [OK].  
Speed Dialing Lists  
13-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
One-Touch Speed Dial List  
31/12 2005 10:32 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
1-TOUCH LIST  
NOT SORTED  
NO.  
DESTINATION TEL  
#
DESTINATION ID  
SEYMOUR GREEN  
ROBERT STUART  
NATALIE SMITH  
JOHN BARRISTER  
ADAM BOOKS.CPA  
[
[
[
[
[
01]  
02] 722 2655  
03] 516 911 4411  
06] 761 1298  
08] 732 2233  
1
914 438 3619  
1
31/12 2005 10:32 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
1-TOUCH LIST  
SORTED  
NO.  
DESTINATION TEL  
#
DESTINATION ID  
ADAM BOOKS.CPA  
JOHN BARRISTER  
NATALIE SMITH  
ROBERT STUART  
SEYMOUR GREEN  
[
[
[
[
[
08] 732 2233  
06] 761 1298  
03]  
02] 722 2655  
01] 914 438 3619  
1
516 911 4411  
1
13  
Speed Dialing Lists  
13-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Coded Speed Dial List  
FAX-L380S  
31/12 2005 10:32 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
CODED DIAL LIST  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
NOT SORTED  
NO.  
DESTINATION TEL  
#
DESTINATION ID  
[
[
[
[
[
01] 555 1234  
BILL  
SEYMOUR GREEN  
NATALIE SMITH  
HUNT INVESTMENTS  
ADAM BOOKS.CPA  
02]  
03]  
04]  
1
1
1
914 438 3619  
516 911 4411  
617222322  
08] 732 2233  
31/12 2005 10:32 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
CODED DIAL LIST  
SORTED  
NO.  
DESTINATION TEL  
#
DESTINATION ID  
ADAM BOOKS.CPA  
[
[
[
[
[
08] 732 2233  
01] 555 1234  
BILL  
04]  
03]  
02]  
1
1
1
617222322  
516 911 4411  
914 438 3619  
HUNT INVESTMENTS  
NATALIE SMITH  
SEYMOUR GREEN  
FAX-L390  
31/12 2005 10:32 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
CODED DIAL LIST  
13  
NOT SORTED  
NO.  
DESTINATION TEL  
#
DESTINATION ID  
[
[
[
[
[
001] 555 1234  
BILL  
SEYMOUR GREEN  
NATALIE SMITH  
HUNT INVESTMENTS  
ADAM BOOKS.CPA  
002]  
003]  
004]  
1
1
1
914 438 3619  
516 911 4411  
617222322  
008] 732 2233  
31/12 2005 10:32 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
CODED DIAL LIST  
SORTED  
NO.  
DESTINATION TEL  
#
DESTINATION ID  
ADAM BOOKS.CPA  
[
[
[
[
[
008] 732 2233  
001] 555 1234  
BILL  
004]  
003]  
002]  
1
1
1
617222322  
516 911 4411  
914 438 3619  
HUNT INVESTMENTS  
NATALIE SMITH  
SEYMOUR GREEN  
Speed Dialing Lists  
13-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Group Dial List  
FAX-L380S  
31/12 2005 13:36 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
GROUP DIAL TEL # LIST  
[
05] CANON GROUP  
[
[
[
[
01] 225 7823  
10] 233 7766  
01] 876 2398  
02] 613 9076  
CANON NY  
CANON CA  
CANON TX  
CANON CA  
FAX-L390  
31/12 2005 13:36 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
GROUP DIAL TEL # LIST  
[
05] CANON GROUP  
[
[
[
[
001] 225 7823  
010] 233 7766  
01] 876 2398  
02] 613 9076  
CANON NY  
CANON CA  
CANON TX  
CANON CA  
13  
Speed Dialing Lists  
13-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User’s Data List  
You can print a list of the data registered in your machine. This list is useful when you want to review  
the user data information you may have entered (such as your name and number, the date and time)  
and all other settings currently selected.  
Follow this procedure to print the USER’S DATA LIST.  
1
2
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <9. PRINT LISTS> press [OK] twice.  
The machine prints the USER’S DATA LIST and the LCD returns to standby mode.  
NOTE  
The LCD returns to standby mode and the USER’S DATA LIST is printed.  
You can also print the USER’S DATA LIST using [Report]. Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Report]  
press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <1.USER DATA>  
press [OK].  
31/12 2005 13:36 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
USER'S DATA LIST  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
1.PAPER SETTINGS  
CASSETTE  
PAPER SIZE  
PAPER TYPE  
MP TRAY  
13  
A4  
PLAIN PAPER  
PAPER SIZE  
A4  
SCANNING  
C
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS  
SYS. ADMIN. INFO  
DEPT. ID MANAGEMNT  
OFF  
TOTAL MEMORY  
8.240MB  
MAIN  
MAIN2  
ECONT  
-----  
-----  
-----  
ECab-01-02  
WLD-02-01  
0027  
User’s Data List  
13-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NOTE  
When you set the System Administrator’s ID and password, System Administrator’s ID, contents of the department  
ID management settings are printed on the USER’S DATA LIST.  
31/12 2005 13:36 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
USER'S DATA LIST  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
1.PAPER SETTINGS  
CASSETTE  
PAPER SIZE  
PAPER TYPE  
MP TRAY  
A4  
PLAIN PAPER  
PAPER SIZE  
A4  
SCANNING  
C
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS  
SYS. ADMIN. INFO  
SYS. ADMIN. ID  
DEPT. ID MANAGEMNT  
ON  
DEPT. ID  
0001234  
0002222  
COPY LIMITS  
001000  
002000  
TX LIMITS  
001000  
002000  
RESTRICTIONS  
RESTRICT PRINTING  
RESTRICT TX  
OFF  
OFF  
TOTAL MEMORY  
8.240MB  
MAIN  
MAIN2  
ECONT  
-----  
-----  
-----  
ECab-01-02  
WLD-02-01  
0027  
13  
User’s Data List  
13-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Department Information List  
When you set the department ID management, you can check the print count and send count by  
printing the DEPT. INFO LIST.  
1
2
3
4
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <9. PRINT LISTS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <3. DEPT. INFO LIST> press [OK].  
Enter the system password.  
The machine prints the DEPT. INFO LIST and the LCD returns to standby mode.  
31/12 2005 17:15 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
DEPT. INFO LIST  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
DEPT. ID  
PRINT COUNT  
COPY LIMITS  
SEND COUNT  
TX LIMITS  
0001234  
0002222  
0003333  
10  
1
5
25  
14  
2
13  
Department Information List  
13-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Document Memory List  
The machine can print a list of documents stored in memory, along with the transaction number (TX/  
RX NO.) of each document.  
1
2
Press [FAX].  
If you are already in the Fax standby mode, you can skip this step.  
Open One-Touch Speed Dial panel press [Report].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.DOC. MEMORY LIST> press [OK].  
The machine prints the DOCUMENT MEMORY LIST and the LCD returns to standby mode.  
NOTE  
Once you know the transaction number of a document stored in memory, you can delete it. (See “Deleting a Fax  
Job,” on p. 12-2.)  
\
31/12 2005 17:15 FAX 123xxxx  
WORLD ESTATE,INC.  
001  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
❉ ❉ ❉  
DOCUMENT MEMORY LIST  
❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉ ❉  
TX/RX NO  
MODE  
DESTINATION TEL/ID  
PGS.  
SET TIME  
ST. TIME  
0046  
0047  
DELAYED TX  
TRANSMIT  
[
[
01] Canon TOKYO  
02] Canon ITALIA  
1
3
31/12 10:07  
31/12 10:26  
23:30  
13  
Document Memory List  
13-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cancel Report Printing  
You can cancel report printing using the CANCEL REPORT item from the REPORT menu.  
1
2
3
4
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <9.PRINT LISTS> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <4.CANCEL REPORT> press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <YES> press [OK].  
Printing is canceled.  
If you do not want to cancel the report, press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <NO> press [OK].  
If there are multiple jobs:  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the report you want to cancel press [OK].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select <YES> press [OK].  
NOTE  
If you want to cancel multiple jobs, select one job at a time, and cancel them one by one.  
13  
Cancel Report Printing  
13-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
14  
Troubleshooting  
CHAPTER  
This chapter describes the problems you might encounter when using the machine and their remedies. It also  
explains what to do if you cannot solve the problem by yourself.  
Clearing Jams  
This section describes how to remove jammed paper.  
Removing Jammed Paper from Inside the Machine  
When print media jams inside the machine, the LCD displays <REC. PAPER JAM> and <OPEN  
PRINTER COVER>.  
CAUTION  
There are some areas inside the machine and cartridge which are subject to high voltages and high  
temperatures. Take adequate precaution when performing internal inspections to avoid burns or  
electrical shock.  
NOTE  
When removing jammed paper from inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to  
come into contact with your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.  
Washing with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.  
Clearing Jams  
14-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1
2
Open the printer cover. If there is any paper left in the cassette or on the output tray, remove it first.  
Remove the cartridge.  
IMPORTANT  
Remove watches and any bracelets or rings when touching the inside of the machine. These items might be  
damaged if they come into contact with the parts inside the machine.  
When removing the jammed paper, do not touch the transfer roller (shaded part) as its surface is very delicate and  
susceptible to finger oil and scratches, which may lead to print deterioration.  
14  
To avoid possible damage to the printer, do not touch the pins near the left end of the transfer roller.  
PINS  
TRANSFER ROLLER  
NOTE  
Do not expose the cartridge to light for more than 5 minutes. If necessary, put the cartridge in its original protective  
bag or wrap it with a thick cloth to prevent exposure to light.  
Clearing Jams  
14-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Open the rear cover and push down the green paper release levers on both sides of the face up paper  
output.  
4
5
Hold both sides of the jammed paper and carefully move it inward, then gently pull it out.  
Roll the leading end of the paper outwards so that the printed surface is on the inside of the roll, then  
gently pull the rolled up paper out of the machine.  
14  
Clearing Jams  
14-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
If the leading edge of the paper is visible but has not entered the imaging area (marked with yellow label),  
pull the paper forwards and roll it inwards.  
If the leading edge of the paper has already entered the imaging area, gently pull out the paper at the face up  
paper output rollers until the edge of the paper appears.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not pull the jammed paper forward from the cassette. It may cause a malfunction.  
Do not pull the jammed paper upward; the toner on the paper will stain the printer and cause a permanent  
reduction in print quality.  
14  
Clearing Jams  
14-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Gently pull the jammed paper between the output rollers until the leading edge emerges from the  
machine.  
8
Carefully pull the jammed paper straight out through the rollers.  
If the jammed paper is badly folded, similar to the folds of an accordion, ease the jammed paper loose and then  
pull it out of the machine.  
9
Push the paper release levers back to their original position and close the rear cover.  
14  
IMPORTANT  
Be sure to push the paper release levers back to their original position. If the levers are left pushed down, the  
paper jam error will not be resolved.  
Never push down the paper release levers while printing. This could result in damage to the fixing assembly.  
Clearing Jams  
14-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Insert the cartridge back into the machine, then close the printer cover.  
For details, see “Installing/Replacing the Toner Cartridge,on p. 2-18.  
IMPORTANT  
After you replace the cartridge and close the printer cover, the machine should be ready for operating. If the  
machine returns to the ready state for operating, troubleshooting has been successful. If the machine does not  
return to the ready state for operating, confirm that the paper release levers are pushed back to their original  
position, and check to see that jammed paper is not left in the machine.  
If paper jam occurs when using the cassette:  
1
Pull out the cassette completely.  
2
Hold both sides of the jammed paper and pull it out from the machine at a downward angle.  
3
4
Insert the cassette to the machine.  
Open and close the printer cover to clear the error message and reset the machine.  
If paper jam occurs when using the multi-purpose feeder:  
1
Hold both sides of the jammed paper and pull it out from the multi-purpose feeder.  
14  
2
Open and close the printer cover to clear the error message and reset the machine.  
Clearing Jams  
14-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing Jammed Paper from the ADF  
When the document jams in the ADF, the LCD displays <CHECK DOCUMENT>.  
1
Widen the slide guides until they stop, and remove the paper so as not to be caught by the slide guides.  
Open the ADF and gently remove the jammed paper from the ADF.  
NOTE  
After removing jammed paper, even edges of the document before loading it in the ADF again.  
14  
Clearing Jams  
14-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LCD Messages  
The following messages are displayed in the LCD when the machine performs a function or if it  
encounters an error.  
Message  
Cause  
Action  
CHANGE PAPERSIZE  
When the machine prints the reports or  
Set the paper size setting to <LTR>, or  
lists, the paper size setting is set to a size <A4> and load paper of the same size.  
other than <LTR>, or <A4>.  
For the TX report or RX report, the  
machine automatically prints the reports  
or lists which was stored in the memory.  
There is a paper jam in the ADF.  
Remove the document in the ADF. (See  
p. 14-7.)  
CHECK DOCUMENT  
Make sure that the document is not too  
long or too short. (See p. 6-1.)  
Then reset the machine by opening the  
printer cover and then closing it.  
The ADF roller rotates without feeding  
documents.  
Fan the edge that will feed into the  
machine first, then tap the edge of  
multiple page documents on a flat surface  
to even the stack.  
The document has stopped in the ADF  
Remove the document in the ADF.  
because you pressed [Stop/Reset] while (See p. 14-7.)  
scanning.  
CHECK PRINTER  
An abnormality has occurred in the  
printer.  
Reset the machine by opening the printer  
cover and then closing it. If the message  
remains, unplug the machine from the  
power supply and call your service  
representative.  
The document is longer than 356 mm for Reduce the length of the document to  
DOCUMENT TOO LONG  
multi-page document, 1 m for one-page  
document, or is not feeding correctly.  
within 356 mm or 1 m.  
14  
There is a paper jam in the ADF.  
Remove the document you are trying to  
copy in the ADF. (See p. 14-7.)  
Make sure that the document is not too  
long or too short. (See p. 6-1.)  
Then reset the machine by opening the  
printer cover and then closing it.  
HANG UP PHONE  
The handset is not placed in the handset Replace the handset correctly.  
cradle correctly.  
INCORRECT PAPER SIZE  
The size of the paper in the cassette or  
Load the correct paper size or change the  
multi-purpose feeder is different from that <PAPER SIZE> setting of the Menu. (See  
of the paper specified in the <PAPER  
SIZE> setting of the Menu.  
p. 16-2.)  
Then reset the machine by opening the  
printer cover and then closing it.  
INSTALL CARTRIDGE  
The cartridge is not installed or not  
installed correctly.  
Install the cartridge correctly. (  
2-18.)  
See p.  
LCD Messages  
14-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Message  
MEM IN USE nn %  
Cause  
Action  
Shows the percentage of memory  
currently in use. This message is  
Wait for the machine to send any faxes in  
memory. Also, print or delete any  
displayed when you set the document in documents in memory you no longer  
ADF. need.  
MEMORY FULL  
The memory is full because collate copy Divide the document and copy each part  
was set when a large document is loaded. separately.  
NOT REGISTERED  
The One-Touch Speed Dial button or  
Coded Speed dialing code you entered  
has not been registered.  
Register the One-Touch Speed Dial  
button or Coded Speed Dialing code.  
(See pages 5-2 and 5-5.)  
PRINTER DATA ERROR  
REC. PAPER JAM  
Abnormality has occurred in the data  
transmission between the machine and  
computer.  
Use [System Monitor] to delete the  
current print job or the final print job (If  
multiple jobs are being printed). Then you  
can shift to the next job. If you use  
<PRINTER RESET> of the Menu, all the  
print jobs are deleted. (See p.16-15.)  
There is a paper jam.  
Clear the paper jam (See pages 14-1 to  
14-7.) and reload paper in the cassette or  
multi-purpose feeder. Then reset the  
machine by opening the printer cover and  
then closing it.  
RECEIVED IN MEMORY  
REMOVE MP PAPER  
The machine received the fax in memory Load correct paper size in the cassette,  
because paper or toner ran out, a paper replace the cartridge, or clear the paper  
jam occurred, or incorrect paper size was jam. (See p.7-6.)  
loaded.  
Paper is loaded in the multi-purpose  
Remove the paper from the multi-purpose  
feeder when the machine receives a fax feeder. If the machine receives the fax  
or prints a report or list.  
then paper is loaded in the multi-purpose  
feeder, the received document will be  
stored in memory.  
REPLACE CARTRIDGE  
The toner cartridge ran out of toner or is Make sure the toner in the cartridge is  
not installed properly.  
evenly distributed or the cartridge is  
installed properly.  
After doing this, if the message remains  
displayed or the print quality is low,  
replace the cartridge. (See p. 2-18.)  
SCANNING  
Memory is getting low during scanning  
because the document has many  
graphics or photos.  
When memory space becomes available  
as printing continues, the scanning  
resumes automatically.  
MAKING SPACE IN MEM  
14  
Then reset the machine by opening the  
printer cover and then closing it.  
PLEASE WAIT  
START AGAIN  
The paper in the cassette has run out, the After loading paper in the cassette,  
toner has run out, paper jams have  
occurred, or the paper size setting is  
wrong while the report is printing.  
replacing the cartridge, clearing jams, or  
specifying the correct paper size, print the  
report again.  
SUPPLY REC. PAPER  
CASSETTE  
No paper is loaded in the cassette.  
Load paper in the cassette. (See p. 2-21 to  
2-23.) Make sure the paper stack in the  
cassette does not exceed the capacity of the  
cassette.  
If you load paper while making copies, do  
not load a different paper size.  
LCD Messages  
14-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Message  
SYSTEM ERROR  
Exxx*  
Cause  
Action  
An error of some kind has occurred  
in the machine.  
Unplug the machine from the power  
supply and wait for approx. 3 minutes to 5  
minutes, then plug it in again. If this does  
not solve the problem, unplug the  
machine and call your service  
representative.  
TX/RX NO. nnnn**  
When the machine sends or receives a  
fax, it assigns a unique identification  
number (nnnn).  
Write down the number for future  
reference.  
*
xxx stands for a number.  
** The identification number does not appear in the standby mode. It appears when scanning documents, operating  
[System Monitor], receiving faxes in Manual mode or memory, or after transmission is completed.  
14  
LCD Messages  
14-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Error Codes  
Errors in reports are recorded as error code numbers because there is not enough space to print a  
detailed description of the error in the report. When errors are recorded in reports, note the error code  
number, and check it against the table below to learn more about what caused the error and how to  
remedy it.  
Numbers  
#0001  
Cause  
Action  
There may be a document jam.  
Clear the jam.  
#0003  
A document longer than 30 cm is being  
sent from the feeder.  
Divide the document into pages and resend from the platen  
glass.  
Data is too large and taking too long to  
send a document.  
It’s taking too long to receive a page.  
Reduce the scan resolution and resend.  
Contact the other party and have them reduce the scan resolution  
or split the document into segments and resend.  
#0005  
The other fax machine did not respond  
within 35 seconds.  
The other party may not be using a G3  
fax machine.  
Send the document again. Contact the other party and have them  
check their fax machine. If you are making an overseas call, add  
a pause to the number.  
Check with the other party and send the document to a G3 fax  
machine. If the other party does not have a G3 fax machine, try  
sending your document using a transmission mode the other  
party’s fax machine supports.  
#0009  
#0011  
No paper is loaded in the cassette or the Load paper in the cassette or set the cassette properly.  
cassette is not set properly.  
If you are polling a fax machine to receive Contact the other party and request that the document be set  
a document, the other party has not set  
the document correctly on the machine.  
correctly for polling on their machine.  
#0012  
#0018  
The other fax machine has run out of  
paper and its memory is full.  
Contact the other party and tell them to refill the paper cassette.  
The other fax did not respond to redialing. Wait for a while and try again. If you still cannot send the  
The document was not sent because the document, contact the other party and have them check if their  
other fax machine was busy and did not  
respond within 55 seconds.  
fax machine is turned on. If the line is busy, wait more and try  
again.  
14  
#0022  
#0034  
The settings for the one-touch speed  
dialing keys or coded speed dialing codes  
you are using to dial the other party have  
been deleted.  
Reset the one-touch or coded speed dialing settings.  
You sent a confidential document to  
Contact the other party and confirm the settings of the other  
another fax machine, but it was rejected. party’s confidential mailbox.  
#0037  
#0995  
The memory is full.  
Print out the faxes received in the memory.  
Resend the fax if needed.  
A waiting fax job has been canceled.  
Error Codes  
14-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Feeding Problems  
Paper does not feed correctly.  
Q
A
Does the cassette or multi-purpose feeder contain an appropriate quantity of sheets?  
Make sure the paper stack in the cassette or the paper in the multi-purpose feeder does not exceed  
the capacity of the cassette or multi-purpose feeder. (See “Loading Paper,on p. 4-3.)  
Q
A
Is paper loaded correctly?  
Make sure the paper stack in the cassette or the paper in the multi-purpose feeder is loaded  
properly, and that the slide guides are adjusted correctly. (See “Loading Paper,” on p. 4-3.)  
Q
A
Is the cassette inserted into the machine correctly?  
Push the cassette into the machine as far as it will go, and make sure the cassette is not tilted or  
inserted at an angle.  
Paper feeds skewed. (Printing is skewed.)  
Q
A
Is paper loaded correctly?  
Make sure the paper stack in the cassette or the paper in the multi-purpose feeder is loaded  
properly, and that the slide guides are adjusted correctly. (See “Loading Paper,” on p. 4-3.)  
A
Make sure the paper exit path is clear.  
14  
Multiple sheets feed into the machine at the same time.  
Q
A
Is paper loaded correctly?  
Make sure the paper stack in the cassette or the paper in the multi-purpose feeder is loaded  
properly, and that the slide guides are adjusted correctly. (See “Loading Paper,” on p. 4-3.)  
Q
A
Have you fanned the paper stack before loading it in the cassette?  
Be sure to fan the paper stack before loading it in the cassette. This keeps the sheets of paper from  
sticking together.  
Paper Feeding Problems  
14-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q
A
Does the cassette or multi-purpose feeder contain an appropriate quantity of sheets?  
Make sure the paper stack in the cassette or the paper in the multi-purpose feeder does not exceed  
the capacity of the cassette or multi-purpose feeder. (See “Loading Paper,on p. 4-3.)  
A
A
Q
A
A
Do not force the paper stack into the cassette or the paper into the multi-purpose feeder.  
Load paper one by one in the multi-purpose feeder.  
Is only one type of paper loaded in the cassette or multi-purpose feeder?  
Load only one type of paper.  
Make sure you load paper that meets the paper requirements for the machine. (See Chapter 4,  
“Paper Handling.)  
Transparencies do not feed correctly.  
Q
A
Are the transparencies loaded correctly?  
Make sure the transparencies in the cassette* or the transparency in the multi-purpose feeder is  
loaded properly, and that the slide guides are adjusted correctly. (See “Loading Paper,on p. 4-3.)  
Q
A
Is the proper transparency loaded in the multi-purpose feeder?  
Do not use any transparencies designed for color copiers. They will cause a paper jam. Please use  
transparencies recommended by Canon.  
*Only for the FAX-L380S  
Paper feeds curled.  
Q
A
Is the proper paper loaded?  
14  
Check if the proper paper is loaded in the cassette or multi-purpose feeder. (See Chapter 4, “Paper  
Handling.)  
Paper stacked roughly.  
Q
A
Is the proper paper loaded?  
Check if the proper paper is loaded in the cassette or multi-purpose feeder. (See Chapter 4, “Paper  
Handling.)  
A
Check if the appropriate paper type is selected in <PAPER TYPE> in <PAPER SETTINGS> of the  
Menu. (See “Loading Paper,on p. 4-3.)  
Paper Feeding Problems  
14-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeated paper jams occur.  
Q
A
Is the proper paper loaded?  
Check that the size, thickness and type of the paper you are using. (See “Print Media Requirements,”  
on p. 4-1.)  
Q
A
Is the proper paper loaded correctly?  
Be sure to fan the paper stack before loading it in the cassette. This keeps the sheets of paper from  
sticking together.  
Q
A
Is the output tray free of obstructions?  
Do not place the delivered paper back on the output tray. (See “Face Down Paper Output Area,on  
p. 4-13.)  
A
Do not place objects other than paper on the output tray. (See “Face Down Paper Output Area,on  
p. 4-13.)  
Q
A
Is the machine installed in a proper location?  
Check that the machine is installed in the proper location. (For information about specifications of the  
machine, see Appendix A, “Specifications.” For safety warnings and cautions, see “Choosing a  
Location for Your Machine,on p. 2-1.)  
Envelopes do not feed correctly.  
Q
A
Are the envelopes loaded correctly?  
Make sure the envelopes are loaded correctly. (See “Loading Envelopes in the Cassette,on p. 4-5,  
or “Loading an Envelope in the Multi-Purpose Feeder,on p. 4-9.) Do not load more than 20  
envelopes in the cassette*. Load an envelope one by one in the multi-purpose feeder.  
14  
Q
A
Is the proper envelope loaded?  
Load the recommended envelopes (COM10, MONARCH, DL, or ISO-C5) in the cassette* or  
multi-purpose feeder. (See “Loading Envelopes in the Cassette,on p. 4-5, or “Loading an Envelope  
in the Multi-Purpose Feeder,on p. 4-9.)  
*Only for the FAX-L380S model.  
Paper Feeding Problems  
14-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing Problems  
Sending Problems  
You cannot send a fax.  
Q
A
Is the machine overheated?  
Unplug the machine and let it cool for approximate 3 minutes to 5 minutes. Then plug in the machine  
and try sending again.  
Q
A
Q
A
Did you connect the power cord to the machine just now?  
Wait for a while. After connecting the power cord, the machine cannot scan documents immediately.  
Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type (pulse/tone)?  
Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See “Setting the Telephone Line  
Type,on p. 3-5.)  
Q
A
Q
Is the document loaded?  
Remove the document, stack it if necessary, and load it in the ADF correctly.  
Is the One-Touch Speed Dial button or Coded Speed Dialing code you entered registered for the  
feature you want to use?  
14  
A
Check the One-Touch Speed Dial button or Coded Speed Dialing code and make sure it is  
registered correctly. (See Chapter 5, “Speed Dialing.)  
Q
A
Q
A
Did you dial a correct number? Or have you been provided with an incorrect number?  
Dial the number again, or check that you have the correct number.  
Does the other party’s fax machine have enough paper?  
Call the other party and ask them to make sure paper is loaded in their fax machine.  
Faxing Problems  
14-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Q
A
Q
A
Did an error occur during sending?  
Print an ACTIVITY REPORT and check for an error. (See “Activity Report,on p. 13-1.)  
Is the telephone line working properly?  
Make sure there is a dial tone when you pick up the handset of the telephone connected to the  
machine. If there is no dial tone, contact your local telephone company.  
Q
A
Q
Is the receiving fax machine a G3 fax machine?  
Make sure the receiving fax machine is compatible with the machine (which is a G3 fax machine).  
The other party’s telephone may be busy or the other party’s fax machine may be turned off. Is  
<BUSY/NO SIGNAL> shown on the ERROR TX REPORT?  
A
A
The fax/telephone number you dialed is busy. Try sending the document later.  
The other party’s fax machine is not working. Contact the other party and have them check their fax  
machine.  
Q
A
Did the receiving fax machine answer within 55 seconds (after all automatic redialing attempts)?  
Contact the other party and have them check their fax machine. For an overseas call, add pauses to  
the registered number. (See “Dialing Long Distance,on p. 10-2.)  
Q
A
Is the In Use/Memory indicator lighting?  
The In Use/Memory indicator may light, which means the extension phone is busy. Please wait until  
the extension phone becomes free.  
Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.  
Q
A
Is the machine (sending fax machine) working properly?  
14  
Check the machine by making a copy. For more information, see Chapter 11, “Making Copies.”  
If the copy is clear, the problem may be in the receiving fax machine. If the copy is spotted or dirty,  
clean the scanning area in the machine. For more information, see Chapter 15, “Maintaining Your  
Machine.”  
Q
A
Is the document loaded?  
Remove the document, stack it if necessary, and load it in the ADF correctly. (See “Loading  
Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.)  
Faxing Problems  
14-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cannot send using ECM (Error Correction Mode).  
Q
A
Does the receiving fax machine support ECM?  
If the receiving fax machine does not support ECM, the document is sent in the normal mode without  
error checking.  
Errors occur frequently while sending.  
Q
A
Are the telephone lines in proper condition? Or do you have a good connection?  
Lower the transmission speed. (See “3.TX START SPEED,on p. 16-6.)  
Receiving Problems  
Cannot receive a fax automatically.  
Q
A
Is the machine set to receive automatically?  
For the machine to receive faxes automatically, the receive mode must be set to <FaxOnly> mode,  
<FaxTel> mode, or <AnsMode>. (See Chapter 7, “Receiving Faxes.) If you have set <AnsMode>,  
confirm that an answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an  
outgoing message properly recorded.  
If you set <3. MAN/AUTO SWITCH> to <ON> in <FAX SETTINGS> of the Menu, the machine will  
receive faxes automatically even when the receive mode is set to <Manual> mode. (See “4.MAN/  
AUTO SWITCH,” on p. 16-10.)  
Q
A
Is the memory full?  
Wait for the machine to finish any fax or print jobs stored in the memory or delete them from the  
memory. (See p. 12-2) Then ask the other party to resend the fax.  
14  
Q
A
Did an error occur during reception?  
Print an ACTIVITY REPORT and check for an error. (See “Activity Report,on p. 13-1.) You can also  
check the RX REPORT when it is printed automatically. (See “Reception (RX) Report,on p. 13-5.)  
Q
A
Is the telephone line connected properly?  
Make sure all line connections are secure. (See “Connecting the Telephone Line,on p. 2-8.)  
Faxing Problems  
14-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The machine does not switch automatically between telephone and fax receptions.  
Q
A
Is the machine set to switch automatically between telephone and fax receptions?  
For the machine to switch automatically, the receive mode must be set to <AnsMode>. (See Chapter  
7, “Receiving Faxes.)  
Confirm that an answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an  
outgoing message properly recorded.  
Q
A
Q
Are you answering the call on a telephone connected to the machine?  
Answer calls using the optional handset or a telephone connected to the unit.  
Is the sending fax machine able to send the CNG signal that tells the machine that the incoming  
signal is a fax?  
A
Some fax machines cannot send the CNG signal that tells the machine the incoming call is a fax.  
In such cases, you will have to receive the fax manually. (See “Receiving Faxes Manually: Manual  
Mode,on p.7-4.)  
Cannot receive a document manually.  
Q
A
Is the machine set to receive manually?  
For the machine to receive faxes manually, the receive mode must be set to <Manual> mode. (See  
Chapter 7, “Receiving Faxes.)  
Q
Did you press [Start] after hanging up the handset?  
A
Always press [Start] before hanging up the handset. Otherwise you will disconnect the call.  
Print quality is poor.  
14  
Q
A
Are you using the correct type of paper?  
Make sure you load paper that meets the paper requirements for the machine. For more information,  
see Chapter 11, “Making Copies.”  
Q
A
Is the sending fax machine functioning properly?  
The sending fax machine usually determines the fax’s quality. Call the sender and have them make  
sure the scanning glass of their fax machine is clean.  
Faxes do not print.  
Q
A
Is the cartridge installed properly?  
Make sure the cartridge is installed properly. For more information, see “Installing/Replacing the  
Toner Cartridge,on p. 2-18.  
Faxing Problems  
14-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q
A
Is any toner left in the cartridge?  
Replace the cartridge with a new one. For more information, see “Installing/Replacing the Toner  
Cartridge,on p. 2-18.  
A
Select <KEEP PRINTING> in <TONER SUPPLY LOW> in <FAX SETTINGS> of the Menu. With this  
setting, the machine will not store documents in the memory even if the toner has run out.  
(See “2.TONER SUPPLY LOW,on p. 16-11.)  
Q
A
A
Is the correct paper loaded in the cassette?  
Make sure paper is loaded in the cassette. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Paper Handling.”  
Load the correct paper size or change <PAPER SIZE> in <PAPER SETTINGS> of the Menu. For  
more information see Chapter 4, “Paper Handling,or Chapter 11, “Making Copies.”  
Faxed images are blotched or uneven.  
Q
A
Are the telephone lines in proper condition? Or do you have a good connection?  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) for sending/receiving should eliminate such problems. However, if the  
telephone lines are in poor condition, you may have to try again. Then call the sender to resend the  
document.  
Q
A
Is the sending fax machine functioning properly?  
The sending fax machine usually determines the fax’s quality. Call the sender and have them make  
sure the scanning glass of their fax machine is clean.  
Cannot receive a fax using ECM (Error Correction Mode).  
Q
A
Does the sending fax machine support ECM?  
14  
If the sending fax machine does not support ECM, the document is received in the normal mode  
without error checking.  
Errors occur frequently while receiving.  
Q
A
Is the sending fax machine functioning properly?  
Call the sender and have them check that their fax machine is functioning properly.  
Faxing Problems  
14-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Telephone Problems  
You cannot dial.  
Q
A
Q
A
Is the telephone line connected properly?  
Make sure all line connections are secure. (See “Connecting the Telephone Line,on p. 2-8.)  
Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type (pulse/tone)?  
Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See “Setting the Telephone Line  
Type,” on p.3-5.)  
The telephone disconnects while you are talking.  
Q
A
Is the telephone line connected in securely?  
Check that the telephone cables are connected securely to the jacks on the machine, the telephone  
jack on your wall and the jack on your telephone. (See “Connecting the Telephone Line,on p. 2-8.)  
14  
Telephone Problems  
14-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying Problems  
The machine will not make a copy.  
Q
A
Is the cartridge installed correctly?  
Make sure the cartridge is installed correctly. (See “Installing/Replacing the Toner Cartridge,on  
p. 2-18.)  
Q
A
Is the sealing tape removed from the cartridge?  
Remove the sealing tape from the cartridge. (See “Installing/Replacing the Toner Cartridge,on  
p. 2-18.)  
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
Is the cassette inserted completely into the machine?  
Insert the cassette as far as it will go. (See “Loading Paper in the Cassette,on p. 2-22.)  
Did you connect the power cord to the machine just now?  
Wait for a while. After connecting the power cord, the machine cannot scan documents immediately.  
Is the document loaded correctly?  
Remove the document, stack it if necessary, and load it in the ADF correctly. (See “Loading  
Documents in the ADF,” on p. 6-3.)  
A
Make sure the ADF is closed.  
14  
If the documents have black streaks or appear dirty after you feed them in the ADF.  
Q
Are the scanning glass and rollers of the ADF clean?  
A
Clean the scanning glass and rollers of the ADF. (See “Cleaning the ADF Area,on p. 15-2.)  
NOTE  
For additional troubleshooting, see “Print Quality Problems,” on p. 14-22.  
Copying Problems  
14-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Print Quality Problems  
The print quality is not what you expect; print is not clear, has missing dots or white streaks.  
Q
A
Are the size, thickness and type of the paper you are using within the specifications of the machine?  
Check that the paper you are using is supported by the specifications of the machine. (See “Print  
Media Requirements,on p. 4-1.)  
Q
A
Is the cartridge installed correctly?  
Make sure the cartridge is installed correctly. (See “Installing/Replacing the Toner Cartridge,on  
p. 2-18.)  
Q
Is any toner left in the cartridge?  
A
Replace the cartridge if necessary. (See “Installing/Replacing the Toner Cartridge,on p. 2-18.)  
Is the exposure adjusted correctly?  
Q
A
Adjust the exposure correctly using [Exposure]. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 11-6.)  
Copies are dirty.  
Q
A
Q
A
Is the scanning glass or the scanning glass cover clean?  
Clean the scanning glass or the scanning glass cover. (See “Cleaning the ADF Area,on p. 15-2.)  
Is the cartridge free of damage?  
14  
If there is a scratch on the cartridge, replace with a new one. (See “Installing/Replacing the Toner  
Cartridge,on p. 2-18.)  
Q
A
Is the machine adjusted to room temperature? If not, condensation might build up inside the  
machine.  
Allow at least 2 hours for the machine to adjust to room temperature before attempting to use it.  
Print Quality Problems  
14-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q
A
Is the machine installed in a stable location?  
Install the machine in a proper location. (See “Choosing a Location for Your Machine,on p. 2-1.)  
Copies are too dark or too light.  
Q
A
Q
A
Is the exposure adjusted correctly?  
Adjust the exposure correctly using [Exposure]. (See “Adjusting the Exposure (Density),on p. 11-6.)  
Is the machine in the toner saver mode?  
Set <TONER SAVER MODE> to “OFF” in <COMMON SETTINGS> of the Menu. (See “5.TONER  
SAVER MODE,” on p. 16-4.)  
The printouts are partly missing or shaded when you make copies on heavy paper.  
Q
A
Is the paper type set correctly?  
Select <HEAVY PAPER> or <HEAVY PAPER H> in <PAPER TYPE> in <PAPER SETTINGS> of the  
Menu. (See “Loading Paper,on p. 4-3.)  
The printouts are missing when you make copies on rough paper.  
Q
A
Is the paper type set correctly?  
Select <TRANSPARENCY> in <PAPER TYPE> in <PAPER SETTINGS> of the Menu. (See “Loading  
Paper,” on p. 4-3.)  
The edges of copies are dirty when you make copies.  
Q
A
Is the paper size set correctly?  
14  
Specify the appropriate paper size in <PAPER SIZE> in <PAPER SETTINGS> of the Menu. (See  
“Loading Paper,” on p. 4-3.)  
Q
A
Is <FREESIZE> selected for the paper size?  
Specify the appropriate size in <VERTICAL SIZE> or <HORIZONTAL SIZE> in <FREESIZE> in  
<PAPER SETTINGS> of the Menu. (See “Specifying the Paper Size,on p. 11-2.)  
Print Quality Problems  
14-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Problems  
The Alarm indicator comes on.  
Q
A
Does the machine feed paper correctly, or is there paper in the cassette or multi-purpose feeder?  
Clear the paper jam, or load paper in the cassette or multi-purpose feeder. (For instructions on  
clearing paper jam, see “Clearing Jams,on p. 14-1. For instructions on loading paper, see “Loading  
Paper,” on p. 4-3.)  
A
If the machine has no paper jam, or paper is loaded in the cassette or multi-purpose feeder, unplug  
the machine and wait approx. 3 minutes to 5 minutes, then plug it in again. If the problem is fixed, the  
Alarm indicator will turn off, and the LCD will return to the standby mode. If the Alarm indicator  
remains flash, unplug the machine, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon  
help line.  
Printout does not match paper size.  
Q
A
Is the paper stack loaded and aligned correctly in the cassette, or is paper loaded in the  
multi-purpose feeder correctly?  
Make sure the paper is loaded and aligned correctly in the cassette or the paper is loaded correctly  
in the multi-purpose feeder. (See “Loading Paper,on p. 4-3.)  
Q
A
Is the appropriate paper size set through the operation panel?  
Specify the appropriate paper size in <PAPER SIZE> in <PAPER SETTINGS> of the Menu. (See  
“Loading Paper in the Cassette,on p. 4-3.)  
14  
Printing Problems  
14-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If You Cannot Solve the Problem  
If you have a problem with your machine and cannot solve it using the information in this chapter,  
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.  
CAUTION  
If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or strange smells, unplug it immediately and  
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. Do not attempt to disassemble or  
repair the machine yourself.  
NOTE  
Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.  
Before contacting your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line, make sure you have the  
following information about your machine:  
The machine’s name: FAX-L380S/L390  
The machine serial number (on a label on the back of the machine)  
SERIAL NUMBER  
14  
Where you purchased the machine  
A detailed description of the problem  
The steps you have taken to solve the problem, and the results  
If You Cannot Solve the Problem  
14-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
15  
Maintaining Your Machine  
CHAPTER  
Your machine requires no maintenance other than periodic cleaning, and replacing of the toner cartridge as needed.  
Cleaning the Machine  
Clean your machine regularly to keep it in good operating condition.  
NOTE  
Follow these precautions whenever you clean the machine:  
-
When cleaning the machine’s exterior or the scanning glass, be sure to disconnect the power cord before  
cleaning the machine.  
-
When the power cord is disconnected, any documents stored in memory will be erased if you leave the machine  
unplugged for 1 hour or more. Be sure to plug the machine in after cleaning to avoid this happening. If  
<RECEIVED IN MEMORY> appears in the LCD display, follow steps on p. 7-6 to print out the document.  
If you disconnect the machine while it is waiting to send a document, you will have to set the machine to send  
your document again once you finish cleaning the machine. However, when you have set a document for  
delayed transmission, the machine holds the document in its memory for about 1 hour.  
Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to the components or  
generate static charges.  
-
-
-
Never use volatile liquids such as thinner, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the interior  
of the machine; these can damage the machine’s components.  
Cleaning the Machine  
15-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cleaning the Machine’s Exterior  
1
2
Disconnect the power cord.  
Wipe the machine’s exterior with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth moistened with water or diluted dishwashing  
detergent solution.  
CAUTION  
Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol, or any other organic solvent to clean the machine, as these can  
damage the machine’s surface.  
3
Plug the power cord back in.  
Cleaning the ADF Area  
Black lines may appear in printouts when the ADF is used to feed documents.  
This is caused by paste, ink, correction fluid, or other foreign matters in the read area of the ADF. Use  
a clean soft cloth to wipe the read area clean. Take particular care to clean at the locations where the  
black lines are appearing on printouts.  
If you have trouble getting the glass clean, wipe with a cloth moistened with water or a mild neutral  
detergent, and then wipe the glass dry with another cloth.  
Read area  
Copy  
Black lines  
Paste,ink,  
correction fluid,  
etc  
15  
IMPORTANT  
Paste, ink, correction fluid, and other foreign matter can soil the scanning glass when you send a document  
through the ADF while the paste, ink, or correction fluid on the original is still wet. This is what causes black lines  
on copies. Whenever you load a document is the ADF, always check to make sure that any paste, ink, or  
correction fluid that is on the document is completely dry.  
NOTE  
When you unplug the machine, any documents stored in memory will be erased if you leave the machine  
unplugged for 1 hour or more. Be sure to plug in the machine after cleaning to avoid this happening.  
Cleaning the Machine  
15-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
2
Disconnect the power cord.  
Open the operation panel by gently pulling it up.  
3
Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to clean the scanning glass and rollers (shaded areas).  
If the document scanning glass and rollers are dirty, the documents you send or print will also be dirty.  
Clean with a soft cloth that will not scratch the glass or rollers.  
Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to wipe up paper dust around the rollers.  
SCANNING  
GLASS  
4
Clean the shaded areas of the operation panel and the machine.  
Dirt and dust particles that collect on the underside of the operation panel also affect the quality of documents you  
copy and send.  
15  
Cleaning the Machine  
15-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
6
When you finished, close the operation panel by pressing it down from the center.  
NOTE  
Be sure to close the operation panel until it locks into place. Otherwise the machine will not function properly.  
Plug the power cord back in.  
15  
Cleaning the Machine  
15-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transporting the machine  
Be sure to disconnect the power cord before transporting the machine. If the machine is likely to be  
subjected to vibration (e.g., when transporting over long distances), the following precautions should  
be taken. If you do not follow these precautions, the machine may be damaged or the quality of your  
printouts may be adversely affected.  
1
2
3
4
Disconnect the power cord.  
If the machine is connected to a telephone or your computer, remove the telephone line or printer cable.  
Open the printer cover.  
Grip the end of the cartridge, and remove it from the machine. In order to avoid direct sunlight, place the  
cartridge in the protective bag that the cartridge came in when you purchased it.  
5
6
7
8
9
Close the printer cover.  
Pull out the cassette completely, and remove the extension cover from the machine.  
Detach the cassette extension from the cassette.  
Insert the cassette in the machine.  
15  
Remove the output tray and document output tray.  
Transporting the machine  
15-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
16  
The Menu System  
CHAPTER  
The Menu allows you to specify or register various settings. This chapter explains the procedure to access the menus  
and their contents.  
Accessing the Menu  
1
2
Press [Menu].  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the menu you want to change press [OK].  
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS  
3.COPY SETTINGS  
COPY SETTINGS  
1.STD. IMAGEQUALITY  
3
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to select the submenu you want to change press [OK].  
COPY SETTINGS  
2.STANDARD EXPOSURE  
STANDARD EXPOSURE  
MANUAL  
NOTE  
For details on submenus, see “Menu Descriptions,on p. 16-2.  
After selecting the item or value with [ (-)] or [ (+)], press [OK] to enter the setting.  
If you press [Stop/Reset] before [OK] is pressed, the item you have selected will not be registered.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to exit from the Menu.  
If you press [Menu], the display returns to the previous screen.  
Accessing the Menu  
16-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Menu Descriptions  
1. PAPER SETTINGS  
Name  
1.CASSETTE  
Descriptions  
1.PAPER SIZE  
Sets the paper size for the paper cassette.  
FAX-L380S: A4, B5, A5, LTR, EXECUTIV,  
ENVELOPE (You can select from COM10,  
MONARCH, DL, or ISO-C5.)  
FAX-L390: A4, LTR  
2.PAPER TYPE  
Sets the paper type to be used in the paper  
cassette.  
FAX-L380S: PLAIN PAPER,  
TRANSPARENCY, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY  
PAPER, HEAVY PAPER H  
FAX-L390: PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L  
2.MP TRAY  
1.PAPER SIZE  
Sets the paper size for the multi-purpose  
feeder.  
A4, B5, A5, LTR, LGL, EXECUTIV,  
ENVELOPE (You can select from DL, ISO-C5,  
COM10, or MONARCH), FREESIZE  
(Horizontal and vertical size can be specified in  
millimeters.)  
2.PAPER TYPE  
Sets the paper type to be used on the  
multi-purpose feeder.  
PLAIN PAPER, TRANSPARENCY, PLAIN  
PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER, HEAVY PAPER H  
16  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. COMMON SETTINGS  
Name  
Descriptions  
1.DEFAULT SETTINGS  
Selects which mode is displayed in the LCD  
when the power cord is connected, or the  
AUTO CLEAR function activates.  
COPY  
The Copy mode is selected.  
The Fax mode is selected.  
FAX  
2.SW AFTER AUTO CLR  
Selects whether the machine switches to the  
mode you set in <DEFAULT SETTINGS> after  
the AUTO CLEAR function activates.  
DEFAULT MODE  
The machine automatically switches to the  
mode you set in <DEFAULT SETTINGS> after  
the AUTO CLEAR function activates.  
CURRENT MODE  
The machine does not automatically switch to  
the mode you set in <DEFAULT SETTINGS>  
even after the AUTO CLEAR function activates.  
3.VOLUME CONTROL  
Adjusts the volume of the machine.  
Adjusts the keypad volume.  
1 to 3  
1.KEYPAD VOLUME  
ON  
OFF  
The volume is turned off.  
Adjusts the alarm volume.  
1 to 3  
2.ALARM VOLUME  
ON  
OFF  
The volume is turned off.  
3.TX DONE TONE  
Adjusts the volume of the done tone sounded  
when the machine has finished sending faxes.  
ON  
1 to 3  
1 to 3  
ERROR ONLY  
16  
OFF  
The volume is turned off.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Name  
4.RX DONE TONE  
Descriptions  
Adjusts the volume of the done tone sounded  
when the machine has finished receiving faxes.  
ON  
1 to 3  
ERROR ONLY  
OFF  
1 to 3  
The volume is turned off.  
5.PRINTING END TONE  
Adjusts the volume of the done tone sounded  
when the machine has finished printing.  
ON  
1 to 3  
ERROR ONLY  
OFF  
1 to 3  
The volume is turned off.  
6.SCANNING END TONE  
Adjusts the volume of the done tone sounded  
when the machine finished scanning.  
ON  
ERROR ONLY  
OFF  
1 to 3  
1 to 3  
The volume is turned off.  
Adjusts the line monitor volume.  
1 to 3 (2)  
7.LINE MONITOR VOL.  
ON  
OFF  
The volume is turned off.  
4.PRINT EXPOSURE  
Adjusts the exposure to one of 5 levels.  
(center)  
5.TONER SAVER MODE  
Sets the toner saver mode.  
ON  
The toner saver mode is turned on.  
The toner saver mode is turned off.  
OFF  
6.DISPLAY LANGUAGE  
Select the message language.  
ENGLISH, FRENCH, SPANISH, GERMAN,  
ITALIAN, DUTCH, FINNISH, PORTUGUESE,  
NORWEGIAN, SWEDISH, DANISH,  
16  
SLOVENE, CZECH, HUNGARIAN, RUSSIAN  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. COPY SETTINGS  
Name  
Descriptions  
Select the document type.  
1.STD. IMAGEQUALITY  
TEXT ORIGINAL: Character mode  
TEXT/PHOTO*1: Text/photo mode  
PHOTO*1: Photo mode  
2.STANDARD EXPOSURE  
Select the auto or manual mode of exposure  
setting.  
AUTO*2  
The exposure is adjusted automatically.  
MANUAL  
The exposure is adjusted manually.  
The exposure can be adjusted in 9 steps.  
(center)  
3.STD ZOOM RATIO  
Selects the copy ratio 050% to 200%. (100%)  
4.STANDARD COPY QTY  
Select the copy quantity.  
01 to 99 (01)  
5.AUTO SORT  
Set the auto sort.  
ON  
The auto sort function is turned on.  
The auto sort function is turned off.  
OFF  
6.PAPER SIZE GROUP  
The paper size group can be selected. If the  
paper size group is changed, the preset copy  
ratios will change.  
INCH  
Preset copy ratios:50%, 64%, 78%, 100%,  
129%, 200%  
A
Preset copy ratios:50%, 70%, 100%, 141%,  
200%  
AB  
Preset copy ratios:50%, 70%, 81%, 86%,  
100%, 115%, 141%, 200%  
7.SHARPNESS  
Black and white of an image can be sharpened.  
When you want to make characters and lines  
clear, select a big number. When you make  
copies of photographs, select a small number.  
1 to 9 (5)  
16  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
*1 STANDARD EXPOSURE automatically changes to MANUAL when TEXT/PHOTO or PHOTO is selected.  
*2 STD. IMAGEQUALITY automatically changes to TEXT ORIGINAL when AUTO is selected.  
Menu Descriptions  
16-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. FAX SETTINGS  
Name  
Descriptions  
1.USER SETTINGS  
Specifies the basic operation settings in the Fax  
mode.  
1.TEL LINE SETTINGS  
Specifies the telephone line settings.  
1.USER TEL NO.  
Your telephone and fax number can be  
registered within 20 digits, including spaces.  
2.TEL LINE TYPE  
TOUCH TONE  
Selects the telephone line type.  
The telephone line is set for touch tone dialing.  
The telephone line is set for rotary pulse dialing.  
ROTARY PULSE  
3.TX START SPEED  
Sets the transmission speed for all documents  
you send.  
33600bps/14400bps/9600bps/7200bps/  
4800bps/2400bps  
4.RX START SPEED  
Sets the transmission speed for all documents  
you receive.  
33600bps/14400bps/9600bps/7200bps/  
4800bps/2400bps  
2.UNIT NAME  
You can register your name or your company  
name within 24 characters, including spaces.  
3.TX TERMINAL ID  
Prints your ID (Transmitting Terminal ID) on  
each page you transmit.  
ON  
After you turn the terminal ID on, you can do  
the following settings.  
1.TTI POSITION  
OUTSIDE IMAGE: Terminal ID is printed  
outside the image border.  
INSIDE IMAGE: Terminal ID is printed inside  
the image border.  
2.TEL NUMBER MARK  
Selects the prefix for the identification header  
number.  
16  
FAX, TEL  
OFF  
No terminal ID is printed on the pages you send.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Name  
4.DENSITY CONTROL  
1.LIGHT  
Descriptions  
Adjusts the scanning density.  
Sets for dark documents. (3)  
Sets for standard documents. (5)  
Sets for light documents. (7)  
2.STANDARD  
3.DARK  
5.OFFHOOK ALARM  
Enables/disables the offhook alarm that alerts  
you when the handset is not in the handset  
cradle.  
ON  
After reception, the offhook alarm sounds when  
the handset is left off the hook.  
OFF  
No offhook alarm.  
6.R-KEY SETTING  
Sets how the fax connects to PBX. If your fax  
machine is not connected through a PBX, you  
can ignore these settings.  
PSTN  
The fax is connected to the outside line.  
PBX  
The fax is connected through a PBX. Select  
one of the following settings, depending on the  
type of PBX in service. Two settings are  
available:  
HOOKING  
PREFIX  
If you select PREFIX, you can set  
a number up to 20 digits long,  
including the “P” at the end.  
2.REPORT SETTINGS  
1.TX REPORT  
Sets the report setting.  
Enables/disables automatic printing of a  
transmission report.  
OUTPUT NO  
No report is printed.  
PRINT ERROR ONLY  
Prints a report only when a transmission error  
occurs.  
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE  
Enables/disables printing of the first page of the  
fax under the report.  
16  
ON  
Prints the first page.  
OFF  
No first page is printed.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Name  
OUTPUT YES  
Descriptions  
Prints a report every time you send a document.  
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE  
Enables/disables printing of the first page of the  
fax under the report.  
ON  
Prints the first page.  
OFF  
No first page is printed.  
2.RX REPORT  
Enables/disables automatic printing of a  
reception report.  
OUTPUT NO  
No report is printed.  
PRINT ERROR ONLY  
Prints a report only when a reception error  
occurs.  
OUTPUT YES  
Prints a report every time you receive a document.  
3.ACTIVITY REPORT  
Enables/disables automatic printing of an  
ACTIVITY REPORT after every 20  
transactions.  
ON  
Prints the ACTIVITY REPORT.  
No ACTIVITY REPORT is printed.  
Sets the transmission functions.  
OFF  
3.TX SETTINGS  
1.ECM TX  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) transmission is  
turned on or off.  
ON  
All transmissions are conducted with ECM if the  
other party’s fax supports ECM.  
OFF  
ECM is turned off.  
2.PAUSE TIME  
Sets the length of the pause you insert into a  
dialing sequence.  
01 to 15SEC (04 SEC)  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
16  
Menu Descriptions  
16-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Name  
3.AUTO REDIAL  
Descriptions  
Sets whether to perform automatic redial when  
the other line is busy or no answer.  
ON  
Customizes the redial operation.  
1.REDIAL TIMES  
Sets the number of retries.  
01 to 10TIMES (02 TIMES)  
2.REDIAL INTERVAL  
Sets period of time between redialings.  
02 to 99MIN. (02 MIN.)  
OFF  
After the first attempt at dialing fails, redialing is  
not attempted.  
4.TIME OUT  
Enables/disables automatic scanning of  
documents after the fax number is entered by  
using speed dialing.  
ON  
Scanning begins automatically in 5 or 10  
seconds after you enter the phone number.  
OFF  
Press [Start] to scan document. Otherwise,  
AUTO CLEAR function activates and the LCD  
returns to standby mode after 2 minutes.  
4.RX SETTINGS  
1.ECM RX  
Sets the reception functions.  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reception is  
turned on or off.  
ON  
All receptions are conducted with ECM if the  
other party’s fax supports ECM.  
OFF  
ECM is turned off.  
2.FAX/TEL OPT. SET  
When FaxTel has been set, the optional  
settings are available.  
1.RING START TIME  
Sets the duration that the machine listens for a  
fax tone before starting to ring.  
00 to 30SEC (08 SEC)  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
16  
Menu Descriptions  
16-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Name  
Descriptions  
2.F/T RING TIME  
Sets the length of time the machine rings to  
alert you of an incoming call.  
010 to 060SEC (022 SEC)  
3.F/T SWITCH ACTION  
Selects the action taken after the F/T RING  
TIME expires.  
RECEIVE  
The machine switches to the fax receive mode  
automatically at this point and starts to receive  
the document.  
DISCONNECT  
The machine disconnects the call.  
3.INCOMING RING  
Sets whether the machine rings when it  
receives a call when the machine is set to  
FaxOnly.  
OFF  
The machine does not ring when it receives a  
fax. (In Energy Saver mode, the fax may ring  
one or two times.)  
ON  
The machine rings when it receives a fax if a  
telephone is connected.  
RING COUNT  
Sets the number of incoming rings before the  
machine answers.  
01 to 99TIMES (02TIMES)  
4.MAN/AUTO SWITCH  
Sets whether the machine switches to  
document receive mode after ringing for a  
specified length of time in the manual receive  
mode.  
OFF  
The machine keeps ringing until someone  
answers the call manually with a connected  
extension telephone.  
ON  
The machine switches to document receive  
mode after ringing for a specified time.  
F/T RING TIME  
Sets the length of time to elapse before the  
machine switches to the document receiving.  
01 to 99SEC (15SEC)  
16  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Name  
Descriptions  
5.REMOTE RX  
Enables/disables remote receiving.  
The machine enables remote receiving.  
ON  
REMOTE RX ID  
You can dial code on the remote extension to  
start receiving a document.  
A combination of two characters using [0] to [9],  
[
] and [#] is possible. (25)  
OFF  
The machine disables remote receiving.  
Sets the print functions.  
5.PRINTER SETTINGS  
1.RX REDUCTION  
ON  
Receives images at a reduced size.  
Image reduction is turned on.  
1.RX REDUCTION  
AUTO SELECTION: Reducing size is set  
automatically.  
FIXED REDUCTION: Reducing size is preset.  
97%, 95%, 90%, 75%  
2.SELECT REDUCE DIR  
VERTICAL ONLY: Reduction is performed in  
the vertical direction only.  
HORIZ & VERTICAL: Reduction is performed  
in the horizontal and vertical direction.  
OFF  
Image reduction is turned off.  
2.TONER SUPPLY LOW  
Allows you to set how the machine responds  
when the toner supply is low.  
RX TO MEMORY  
The machine receives all documents in memory.  
KEEP PRINTING  
The keep printing function is turned on. With  
this setting, the machine will not store  
documents in memory if the toner has run out.  
Re-set to RX TO MEMORY after replacing the  
cartridge with a new one.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
16  
Menu Descriptions  
16-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Name  
Descriptions  
6.POLLING BOX  
1.SETUP FILE  
Sets the functions of SETUP FILE, CHANGE  
DATA and DELETE FILE.  
Registers a polling box.  
1.FILE NAME  
Enters a name for poling box (Max. 24  
characters, including spaces).  
2.PASSWORD  
Enters a password to protect the polling box  
settings (Max. 7 characters).  
3.ERASE AFTER TX  
Tells the machine how to handle a document  
after it is polled and sent.  
ON, OFF  
2.CHANGE DATA  
Changes the settings of the polling box.  
Changes the file name.  
1.FILE NAME  
2.PASSWORD  
Changes the password.  
3.ERASE AFTER TX  
Changes the ERASE AFTER TX setting.  
Deletes the polling box and all of its settings.  
3.DELETE FILE  
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Sets the functions of MEMORY LOCK RX, FAX  
DEFAULT, LOCK PHONE and COUNTRY  
SELECT.  
1.MEMORY LOCK RX  
Sets the Memory Lock functions.  
OFF  
Prints a document as soon as the machine  
receives it.  
ON  
Receives and stores all documents in memory.  
They will not be printed out unless the Memory  
Lock password is entered.  
1.MEM LOCK PASSWORD  
0 to 9999999  
This password protects the Memory Lock  
settings. Setting a password is recommended.  
You must use this password to unlock the  
memory so you can print documents stored in  
memory. Use the numeric buttons to enter a  
password (up to seven digits).  
16  
2.REPORT  
Sets the machine to print reports. This setting  
affects only reports that print automatically,  
such as an Activity Report.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Name  
Descriptions  
OUTPUT NO  
No report prints while in the Memory Lock  
mode.  
OUTPUT YES  
A report prints while the machine is in the  
Memory Lock mode.  
2.FAX DEFAULT  
1.RESOLUTION  
Sets the FAX DEFAULT functions.  
Sets the fax resolution.  
OFF  
The setting of resolution set using [Image  
Quality] remains even after the AUTO CLEAR  
function activates.  
STANDARD  
FINE  
Suitable for most text-only documents.  
Suitable for fine-print documents.  
PHOTO  
Suitable for documents that contain  
photographs.  
SUPER FINE  
ULTRA FINE  
Suitable for documents that contain fine print  
and images. (The resolution is four times that of  
STANDARD)  
Suitable for documents that contain fine print  
and images. (The resolution is eight times that  
of STANDARD)  
2.SCAN DENSITY  
Sets the machine’s standard scanning density.  
OFF, LIGHT, STANDARD, DARK  
3.LOCK PHONE  
Sets the LOCK PHONE functions.  
Outgoing voice call is operational.  
Outgoing voice call is not operational.  
OFF  
ON  
4.COUNTRY SELECT*  
Selects the country where you are using your  
machine.  
UK/GERMANY/FRANCE/ITALY/SPAIN/  
HOLLAND/  
DENMARK/NORWAY/SWEDEN/FINLAND/  
AUSTRIA/  
BELGIUM/SWITZERLAND/PORTUGAL/  
IRELAND/  
16  
GREECE/LUXEMBOURG/HUNGARY/CZECH/  
RUSSIA/SLOVENIA/SOUTH AFRICA/  
OTHERS  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
*
This setting is only available for some countries.  
Menu Descriptions  
16-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ADD. REGISTRATION  
Name  
Descriptions  
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
Registers the information on One-Touch Speed  
Dialing.  
Up to 31 destinations can be registered.  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
Selects a One-Touch Speed Dial button.  
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
Registers the other party’s telephone number  
(Max. 120 digits, including spaces).  
2.NAME  
Registers the other party’s name (Max. 16  
characters, including spaces).  
2.CODED SPD DIAL  
Registers the information on Coded Speed  
Dialing.  
CODED SPD DIAL  
Selects a Coded Speed Dialing code.  
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
Registers the other party’s telephone number  
(Max. 120 digits, including spaces).  
2.NAME  
Registers the other party’s name (Max. 16  
characters, including spaces).  
3.GROUP DIAL  
Registers the information on Group Dialing.  
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
Registers the other party’s telephone numbers  
by specifying the One-Touch Speed Dial  
buttons or Coded Speed Dialing codes.  
2.NAME  
Registers the group’s name (Max. 16 characters,  
including spaces).  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
6. PRINTER SETTINGS  
16  
Name  
Descriptions  
1.PRESET PRINT QTY  
Sets the standard number of pages of the  
printer function. 01 to 99 (01)  
2.AUTO ERROR SKIP  
Sets either printing with skipping an error  
automatically, or without skipping an error.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Name  
Descriptions  
ON  
The auto error skip is on. The error is skipped  
and shifted to the next job automatically without  
indicating an error code.  
OFF  
The auto error skip is off. Skip the error and  
shift to the next job manually.  
3.ERROR TIME OUT  
Sets the length of time before the machine  
returns an error when no data is received from  
the computer.  
ON  
The error time out is on. Sets time out period  
005SEC to 300SEC. (015SEC)  
OFF  
The error time out is off.  
4.PRINTER RESET  
Cancels the job currently being received and  
the job already received.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
7. TIMER SETTINGS  
Name  
1.DATE/TIME SETTING  
2.AUTO CLEAR  
Descriptions  
Enter the current date and time.  
Sets the auto clear function. If the machine  
remains idle for a certain period of time, the  
display returns to the standby mode.  
ON  
The auto clear function is turned on.  
1MIN. to 9MIN. (2MIN.)  
OFF  
The auto clear function is turned off.  
Sets the energy saver mode.  
3.ENERGY SAVER  
ON  
The energy saver mode is set.  
03MIN. to 30MIN. (05MIN.)  
16  
OFF  
The energy saver mode is turned off.  
4.DATE SETUP  
Set the format for the DATE & TIME settings  
menu and how the date is displayed in the LCD.  
DD/MM YYYY, YYYY MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Name  
Descriptions  
Sets the summer time.  
5.SUMMER TIME  
OFF  
The summer time setting is disabled.  
The summer time setting is enabled.  
ON  
1.BEGIN DATE/TIME  
2.END DATE/TIME  
Sets the MONTH, WEEK, DAY and TIME when  
the summer time starts.  
Sets the MONTH, WEEK, DAY and TIME when  
the summer time ends.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
8. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Name  
Descriptions  
SYSTEM SETTINGS PASSWORD  
Enter the system password protecting the  
system settings. (You do not have to do this if  
the system settings are not yet password  
protected.)  
1.SYS. ADMIN. INFO  
Set the System Administrator’s ID and  
password to protect the system settings.  
You cannot use ‘0’ for the System  
Administrator’s ID.  
If you set the System Administrator’s ID to 0,  
the registered System Administrator’s ID is  
deleted.  
1.SYS. ADMIN. ID.  
2.SYSTEM PASSWORD  
2.DEPT. ID MANAGEMNT  
1-9999999  
1-9999999  
Set restrictions for sending and printing with  
Department IDs and passwords.  
OFF  
Department ID management function is turned  
‘OFF’.  
16  
ON  
Department ID management function is turned  
‘ON’. Set how the use of the machine will be  
restricted.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
Menu Descriptions  
16-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Name  
Descriptions  
1.DEPT. ID ENTRY  
Set the Department ID number from 00 to 99,  
and enter the Department ID from 1 to  
9999999. You cannot set the Department ID  
and password to 0.  
1.PASSWORD  
2.COPY LIMITS  
1-9999999  
0-999999  
0-999999  
3.TX LIMITS  
2.COUNT MANAGEMENT  
1.COUNT INFORMATION  
Display the counter information for each  
department.  
1.PRINT COUNT  
2.SEND COUNT  
2.COUNT RESET  
1. ON  
Reset the counter.  
2. OFF  
3.RESTRICTIONS  
Prints out a list of items set or registered in the  
Menu.  
1.RESTRICT PRINTING  
Set the printing limits ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’.  
OFF  
ON  
If RESTRICT PRINTING is turned ‘ON’, the  
printing operations, such as printing reports  
manually, or documents stored in memory, are  
counted in the COPY LIMITS function.  
2.RESTRICT TX  
Set the sending restriction ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’.  
If RESTRICT TX is turned ‘ON’, the sending  
operations are counted in the TX LIMITS  
function.  
OFF  
ON  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
16  
Menu Descriptions  
16-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. PRINT LISTS  
Name  
Descriptions  
1.USER DATA  
Prints out a list of items set or registered in the  
Menu.  
2.SPEED DIAL LIST  
Prints the list of the fax/telephone numbers  
registered for One-Touch Speed Dial buttons,  
Coded Speed Dialing codes or group dialing.  
1.1-TOUCH LIST  
1.NO SORT  
Prints the One-touch List.  
The printout of the list is not sorted.  
The printout of the list is sorted.  
Prints the Coded Dial List.  
2.SORT  
2.CODED DIAL LIST  
1.NO SORT  
The printout of the list is not sorted.  
The printout of the list is sorted.  
Prints the Group Dial List.  
2.SORT  
3.GROUP DIAL LIST  
3.DEPT. INFO LIST  
Prints out the DEPT. INFO LIST. When DEPT.  
ID is set, enter the DEPT. ID to print the DEPT.  
INFO LIST.  
4.CANCEL REPORT  
REPORT STATUS  
Cancels printout of the report. Select report you  
want to cancel the printout.  
Displays the report status and allows you to  
select the report job to be canceled. Select a  
job press [OK].  
CANCEL REPORT? YES  
CANCEL REPORT? NO  
The printout of the list is canceled.  
The printout of the list is not canceled.  
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)  
16  
Menu Descriptions  
16-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A
Specifications  
APPENDIX  
The specifications for the machine are listed in this section.  
General  
Applicable line:  
Compatibility:  
Public Switched Telephone Network  
G3  
Data compression system:  
Modem type:  
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
FAX modem  
33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000,  
9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps (automatic fallback)  
Modem speed:  
Approx. 3 seconds/page*  
(transmitting from memory)  
Transmission speed:  
Approx. 8 MB, DRAM, JBIG storage  
Approx. 510 pages**  
LCD displays memory used  
Transmission/reception memory  
Liquid crystal display:  
Display languages:  
20 × 2  
ENGLISH, FRENCH, SPANISH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, DUTCH, FINNISH,  
PORTUGUESE, NORWEGIAN, SWEDISH, DANISH, SLOVENE, CZECH,  
HUNGARIAN, RUSSIAN  
Power source:  
200–240 V/ 50/60 Hz  
Maximum: Approx. 800 W  
Minimum: Approx. 10 W  
Energy Saver Mode: 7 W  
Power consumption:  
FAX-L380S: 438 × 401 × 336 mm  
FAX-L390: 441 × 466 × 392 mm  
(main machine only, no trays, no optional handset)  
Dimensions  
(W × D × H):  
Weight:  
Approx. 11 kg (12.1 kg for the FAX-L390 model)  
Temperature: 10°–32.5°C  
Humidity: 20–80% RH  
Environmental requirements:  
Electrical safety: GS, EN60950, FIMKO  
Radiation: CISPR Pub 22, Class B  
PTT  
Energy Star compliant  
CE Marking  
Applicable standards:  
PC Interface:  
USB Interface  
*
Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No.1, JBIG, standard mode  
** Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No.1, standard mode  
General  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Plain Paper Fax  
50 A4- or LTR-size sheets  
Automatic document feeder capacity:* 20 LGL-size sheets  
1 sheet for sizes other than A4-, LTR, or LGL-size sheets.  
Multi-page document: Max.: 216 × 356 mm/ Min.: 148 × 105 mm  
Document size:  
One-page document: Max.: 216 mm × approx. 1 m/ Min.: 148 × 105 mm  
Multi-page document: 0.07 – 0.13 mm  
One-page document: 0.06 – 0.23 mm  
Document thickness:  
2
Multi-page document: 50 – 105 g/m  
Document weight:  
Transmission time:  
2
One-page document: 50 – 240 g/m  
Approx. 3 seconds** (G3 JBIG)  
Standard mode: 8 pels/mm × 3.85 lines/mm  
Fine mode: 8 pels/mm × 7.7 lines/mm  
Resolution:  
Photo mode: 8 pels/mm × 7.7 lines/mm  
Super fine mode: 8 pels/mm × 15.4 lines/mm  
Ultra fine mode: 16 pels/mm × 15.4 lines/mm  
Ultra-High-Quality Image  
Processing System (UHQ™)  
Halftones: 256 levels of gray  
9 density adjustment levels  
Scanning image processing:  
Recording method:  
Fax printing speed:  
Laser Beam printing  
Approx. 18 pages/minute**  
Automatic dialing:  
– One-Touch Speed Dialing (31 locations)  
– Coded Speed Dialing (100 locations (FAX-L380S)/169 locations  
(FAX-L390))  
– Group Dialing (130 locations (FAX-L380S)/199 locations (FAX-L390))  
Dialing:  
Regular 10-button dialing  
(with numeric buttons)  
Automatic redialing  
Manual redialing  
Pause button  
A
Delayed transmission (up to 141 locations (FAX-L380S)/210 locations  
(FAX-L390) at a single pre-set time)  
Sequential broadcast (up to 141 locations (FAX-L380S)/210 locations  
Networking:  
(FAX-L390))  
Automatic receiving  
Non-ring reception  
Deactivate ECM  
Activity report (up to 20 transactions)  
Non-delivery report  
TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)  
Report/reference:  
Toner saver:  
Economy mode for printing received faxes decreases toner consumption by  
approx. 30%.  
Plain Paper Fax  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
*
Based on 75 g/m paper  
** Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No.1, A4, standard mode  
A
Plain Paper Fax  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copier  
Resolution:  
Default size:  
Zoom:  
300 × 300 dpi  
100%  
50-200%  
Multiple copies:  
Up to 99 copies of a document  
Telephone  
Automatic FAX/TEL switchover  
Answering machine connection  
(CNG detecting signal)  
Telephone connection  
Optional handset connection*  
Remote reception by telephone  
(Default reception ID: 25)  
Tone button  
Redial/Pause button  
*
This feature is available for certain countries only.  
A
Copier  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer  
Printing method:  
Printing resolution:  
Paper handling:  
Laser beam printing  
1,200 dpi enhanced × 600 dpi  
Automatic feed  
2
2
2
Cassette Feeding: 64 g/m to 128 g/m ; Multi-Purpose Feeder: 64 g/m to  
2
128 g/m  
Acceptable recording paper stock Plain paper, colored paper, recycled paper (including 100% recycled  
paper), transparencies, envelopes, and heavy paper  
2
(up to 128 g/m )  
European DL envelope (220 × 110 mm)  
Envelope sizes:  
U.S. Commercial No. 10 envelope (9.5 × 4.1 in.)  
Printing width:  
Maximum 206 mm (A4)  
Cassette Feeding: 250 sheets (FAX-L380S)/500 sheets (FAX-L390) of 64  
2
Paper Feeding System  
g/m  
Multi-Purpose Feeder: 1 sheet  
The Canon genuine Cartridge T Starter (Yield: Approx. 2,500 page of  
printouts based on 5% coverage of a A4-size page)  
The Canon genuine Cartridge T (Yield: Approx. 3,500 page of printouts  
based on 5% coverage of a A4-size page)  
Printing Cartridge  
A
Printer  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printable Area: Papers  
The shaded area in the following figure shows the printable area for papers.  
Printable area:  
A4-size  
LTR-size  
LGL-size  
a:  
b:  
c:  
d:  
e:  
f:  
210 mm  
8.5”  
8.5”  
Max. 5.0 mm  
Max. 5.0 mm  
297 mm  
Max. 5.0 mm  
Max. 5.0 mm  
Max. 0.2”  
Max. 0.2”  
11.0”  
Max. 0.2”  
Max. 0.2”  
Max. 0.2”  
Max. 0.2”  
14.0”  
Max. 0.2”  
Max. 0.2”  
A
Printer  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printable Area: Envelopes  
The shaded portion in the following figure shows the printable area for envelopes.  
b
c
e
d
f
Printable area:  
European DL  
U.S. Commercial No. 10  
a:  
b:  
c:  
d:  
e:  
f:  
110 mm  
4.1”  
Max. 5.0 mm  
Max. 5.0 mm  
220 mm  
Max. 5.0 mm  
Max. 5.0 mm  
Max. 0.2”  
Max. 0.2”  
9.5”  
Max. 0.2”  
Max. 0.2”  
CAUTION  
A
For some envelope types, the edges of the envelope can not be printed on.  
Printer  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Document Sizes  
The following illustrations show the largest and smallest documents you can feed into the machine.  
Maximum Document Size  
Minimum Document Size  
148mm  
216 mm  
105mm  
Multi-page document:  
356 mm  
One-page document:  
1 m  
The figure below shows how much of a A4-, LTR-, or LGL-size document the machine scans when  
faxing or scanning.  
A4/LETTER/LEGAL  
A
The margin at each edge is outside the machine’s scanning area.  
Document Sizes  
A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer Driver  
IBM or compatible computer with the following Pentium processor:  
Microsoft Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000, or  
Windows® XP  
–Windows® 98: A 90-megahertz (MHz) Pentium processor or higher/At  
least 32 MB of RAM and 115 MB of available hard disk space  
–Windows® Me: A 150-MHz Pentium processor or higher/At least 32 MB of  
RAM and 115 MB of available hard disk space  
–Windows® 2000: A 133-MHz Pentium processor or higher/At least 64 MB  
of RAM (Windows® 2000 Professional), or 128 MB of RAM (Windows®  
2000 Server) and 500 MB of available hard disk space  
–Windows® XP: A 300-MHz Pentium processor or higher/At least 64 MB of  
RAM and 500 MB of available hard disk space  
System requirements:  
256-color SVGA monitor or greater  
USB Port  
USB cable no longer than 5 meters  
CD-ROM Drive, or access to one over a network connection  
A
Printer Driver  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attaching the Optional  
Handset to the Machine  
B
APPENDIX  
This section describes how to attach the optional handset to your machine.  
Handset  
The optional handset is available in certain countries. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer for  
more information on purchasing this option.  
NOTE  
Please note that the shape of your handset may differ from the one shown in this section. However, both handsets  
have exactly the same functions and performance.  
Make sure you have the following items. If anything is damaged or missing, notify your Canon dealer  
immediately.  
HANDSET  
SCREWS WITH PLUGS (2)  
HANDSET CRADLE  
Handset  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Attaching the Handset to Your Machine  
To attach the handset to your machine, follow these steps:  
1
Remove the screws from the plugs and insert the plugs into the holes on the handset cradle.  
2
Insert the plugs with the handset cradle in the holes on the machine.  
NOTE  
If you have difficulty inserting the plugs, turn the machine so that the left side is facing you and the right side is  
placed against a wall. This will allow you to insert the plugs without the machine moving.  
B
Handset  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
4
Insert the screws into the plugs and push them in with your finger.  
Connect the handset cord to the input jack marked  
at the back of the machine.  
CAUTION  
When carrying the machine, do not lift it by the handset cradle as it may break.  
B
Handset  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Ringer Volume Switch  
The ringer volume switch allows you to select the ring volume of the handset for incoming calls. Use a  
pen or other pointed object to adjust the switch to high or low.  
RINGER VOLUME SWITCH  
The type of handsets you can connect is different depending on the area you use your machine.  
Maintaining Your Handset  
Follow these guidelines to maintain your handset in top working condition.  
Do not leave your handset exposed to direct sunlight.  
Do not install your handset in hot or humid conditions.  
Do not spray aerosol polishes on your handset as they may enter the holes on your handset and  
cause damage.  
Use a damp cloth to clean your handset.  
B
Handset  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
C
Country-Specific Features  
APPENDIX  
United Kingdom  
Connecting External Device  
If the connectors of the external devices cannot be connected to the jacks on the machine, you will  
need to purchase one or more B.T. adaptors to connect them as follows:  
B.T. ADAPTOR  
Ringer Equivalence Number (R.E.N.)  
Your British Telecom line has a maximum R.E.N. capacity of 4. Your FAX has an R.E.N. value of 1  
(unless otherwise stated), and so does the optional handset. You can therefore use additional  
equipment with a total R.E.N. value of up to 2. If the R.E.N. value exceeds 4, the ringer volume will be  
reduced and one or more of the connected equipment may not function.  
United Kingdom  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Germany  
This product is designed for use for residential, commercial and light-industrial purposes.  
Applicable Standards  
Electrical Safety: CE, GS  
Radiation: CISPR Pub 22 Class B  
Other: Energy Start compliant, CE Marking, Telefax Standard (DTS)  
Connecting the Telephone Line Cord  
Follow the procedure below to connect the telephone line cord.  
REAR COVER  
POWER  
CONNECTOR  
USB PORT  
THIS JACK DOES NOT FUNCTION  
THIS JACK DOES NOT FUNCTION  
TELEPHONE LINE JACK  
Connect one end of the supplied telephone line cord to the  
then the other end to the telephone line jack on the wall.  
jack,  
C
NOTE  
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, first connect the telephone line cord to the machine, then connect it to the  
telephone line jack on the wall.  
Use the TAE-cable to connect the machine to the analogue switch point.  
Germany  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting a Telephone  
You can connect both the machine and a telephone to the same telephone line jack on the wall using a  
single telephone line cord.  
Purchase a telephone licensed in Germany. For the telephone connection, you need a TAE connection  
box with NF-code. Connect the telephone to the F-code jack and the machine to the N-code jack of the  
connection box.  
Connecting an Answering Machine  
By connecting an answering machine to the same telephone line jack on the wall as the FAX, you can  
not only receive documents from another fax, but also receive voice calls.  
If you use an answering machine which does not correspond to DIN44015, compatibility problems  
may occur with your machine.  
Purchase an answering machine licensed in Germany.  
To connect an answering machine with a telephone integrated, you need a TAE connection box with  
NF-code. Connect the answering machine to the F-code jack and the machine to the N-code jack of  
the connection box.  
To connect an answering machine without a telephone integrated, use a connection box with  
NFN-code.  
NOTE  
Canon cannot guarantee that all answering machines will be compatible with your machine, due to varying  
specifications.  
If you have connected an external device to your machine, be sure to set the correct receive mode (See Chapter  
7).  
If you want to connect your machine through a PBX, read the information on p. 10-1.  
Customer Support  
If you cannot solve the problem or if you think your machine needs servicing, contact to the following  
phone numbers or URLs.  
Canon Hotline 0180-5006022  
http://www.canon.de  
Germany  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
APPENDIX  
A
AC  
Alternating current. The type of electrical current available from a wall outlet.  
Activity report  
A journal of the machine’s fax transactions, both sent and received.  
Application program  
Software prepared for a specific function or set of functions. Developers who make application programs  
include drivers that support different types of printers.  
ASCII  
Acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A set of definitions for the bit composition  
of characters and symbols. ASCII defines 128 symbols using 7 binary bits and 1 parity bit.  
Auto FAX/TEL switching  
See FAX/TEL switching.  
Automatic dialing  
Dialing fax or telephone numbers by pressing one or three buttons. To use automatic dialing, you must  
register the numbers in the machine’s memory. See also One-Touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing,  
and Group Dialing.  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
The device included in the machine that feeds the document being faxed, copied, or scanned into the  
machine.  
Automatic image reduction  
The machine can print the date, time, company name, and a fax number at the top of the faxes it receives. To  
prevent this information from crowding the faxed image on the page and possibly lengthening the fax, the  
machine automatically reduces the size of the image on the page.  
Automatic redialing  
When the receiving fax machine is busy or does not answer, or when an error occurs while sending, the  
machine waits a specified time and then automatically redials the number. If the receiving fax is still busy or  
does not answer, the machine waits the specified time and dials again. If the fax still does not go through, the  
machine prints an error TX report.  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B
bps  
Bits per second. Refers to the speed with which a fax machine sends and receives data.  
Broadcasting  
Transmitting documents to more than one location (through the machine’s memory).  
C
CCITT/ITU-T  
Formerly known as CCITT, Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone. CCITT has  
been replaced by the International Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications sector (ITU-T), a  
committee created to set international standards for telecommunications.  
CNG  
Calling Tone. This is a signal sent by fax machines to identify the call as an incoming document. When the  
receiving fax detects this signal, it automatically starts to receive the fax transmission. The majority of fax  
machines in use today can send and detect CNG signals.  
Coded Speed Dialing  
An automatic dialing method that allows you to dial a fax or telephone number by pressing [Coded Dial] and a  
two-digit code (a three-digit code for the FAX-L390 model) using the numeric buttons.  
Cursor  
The underline symbol you see on the LCD display when you register numbers and names in the machine.  
Press [ (-)] or [ (+)] to move the cursor.  
D
Delayed sending  
The ability to send a document at a preset time in the future. You do not have to be in your office to use  
delayed sending to one or more destinations. (You can set up only one delayed transmission at a time on the  
machine.)  
Dialing methods  
Ways of pressing one or more buttons to access a number to connect to an outside party or fax machine.  
Dialing methods include One-Touch, Coded Speed Dialing, Group Dialing, Directory Dialing, and regular  
dialing with the numeric buttons.  
Document  
The sheet of paper containing the data that you send to, or receive from a machine.  
dpi  
Dots per inch. A machine of measurement for indicating a machine’s resolution. Your machine produces a  
resolution of 1,200 dpi enhanced × 600 dpi.  
Dual access (Multitasking)  
Enables the machine to receive a fax, even if it is copying or printing a document. Also enables you to load  
other faxes into memory, make copies, print out reports, print documents or register information while the  
machine sends a fax from memory.  
G
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
ECM  
Error Correction Mode. The ability of your machine to reduce system and line errors when sending or  
receiving from another fax with ECM capability. ECM is most effective in areas where the telephone lines are  
in poor condition or there is frequent interference on the line. Do not use ECM if you need to send a  
document quickly and you are sure the other party can read your transmission without it (turning off ECM  
also turns off MMR).  
Extension  
A telephone connected to the machine that is used in place of the handset. You can use the extension  
telephone to activate incoming reception of documents manually.  
F
FAX/TEL switching  
This option allows you to set the machine to automatically detect whether a call is from a fax or telephone. If  
the call is from another fax, the transmission is automatically received. If the call is from a telephone, the  
machine rings to let you know, so you can pick up the handset. With this feature, one telephone line can be  
shared by both the telephone and the fax.  
FINE  
The resolution setting for documents with very small characters and lines.  
G
G3, Group 3 fax machine  
Defined by CCITT/ITU-T. Uses encoding schemes to transmit image data while reducing the amount of data  
that needs to be transmitted, thus reducing transmission time. G3 fax machines can transmit one page in less  
than one minute. Encoding schemes for G3 fax machines are Modified Huffman (MH), Modified READ (MR),  
and Modified Modified READ (MMR).  
Grayscale  
Representing color in black and white as a result of different intensities of color. Different colors and  
intensities of colors appear as different shades of gray.  
Group Dialing  
A dialing method that enables you to dial registered One-Touch Speed Dialing or Coded Speed Dialing  
numbers together as a group. This means that you can press just one or a few buttons to enter numbers  
when sending the same document to many destinations.  
H
Halftone  
Using this method, the machine produces shades of gray by mapping dots to be printed.  
G
G-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
Interface  
The connection between two devices that makes it possible for them to communicate with each other. The  
machine features a USB interface, which makes it compatible with IBM and similar personal computers.  
Interface cable  
The cable used to create the interface between a printer and a computer.  
Interface port  
The machine comes with one USB port, located on the back of the machine. You attach the cable that  
connects your computer and machine to this port.  
J
Jack  
The telephone receptacles on your wall or on your machine used to connect the machine to the telephone  
line, answering machine, handset, or telephone.  
M
Manual receiving  
A method of receiving faxes in which you answer all incoming calls using the optional handset. If you hear a  
slow beep it indicates an incoming fax transmission from another machine. Just press [Start] to receive the  
incoming fax.  
Manual redialing  
When you use regular dialing, you can redial a number manually simply by pressing [Redial/Pause] on the  
operation panel. The last number called is the number redialed.  
Memory broadcast  
Allows you to send a scanned fax to two or more destinations at once, using a combination of One-Touch  
Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing, and regular dialing.  
Memory sending  
Scans a document into memory before the machine dials the number(s) and sends it. This method allows you  
to retrieve your original document immediately after scanning.  
Modem  
A device that converts (MOdulates) digital data for transmission over telephone lines. At the receiving end,  
this device converts the modulated data (DEModulates) to digital format that the computer understands.  
N
Noise  
A term applied to a variety of problems that impair the operation of telephone lines used for faxing.  
Numeric buttons  
The round, numbered buttons on the operation panel marked the same as a standard telephone keypad.  
Press them to perform regular dialing. You also use the numeric buttons to enter numbers and letters when  
you register numbers and names, and for entering Coded Speed Dialing codes.  
G
G-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O
One-Touch Speed Dialing  
An automatic dialing method that allows you to dial a fax or telephone number by pressing a single  
One-Touch Speed Dial button. The machine can store up to 31 numbers for One-Touch Speed Dialing.  
One-Touch Speed Dial buttons  
The buttons numbered 01 to 31 on the operation panel, each of which may be registered as a fax or  
telephone number. Once a number is registered, you press one button to dial the entire number.  
P
Paper feed  
Refers to guiding a sheet of paper into the machine’s paper path.  
Pause  
A timing entry required for registering certain long distance numbers and for dialing out through some  
telephone systems or switchboards. Pressing [Redial/Pause] enters a pause between digits of a telephone  
number.  
Photo  
The document setting you use for sending or copying documents with intermediate tones, such as  
photographs.  
Polling  
One fax machine requesting another to send a document. The receiving party calls the fax machine holding  
the document to be sent, and requests that it be sent.  
Printable area  
The area of a sheet of paper on which a printer can reproduce text or graphics (the printing area is smaller  
than the paper). On this machine, the printing area varies depending on the type of paper being used.  
Printer driver  
The printer driver allows you to use the machine as a printer for your PC with Windows 98, Windows Me,  
Windows 2000, or Windows XP installed. To use the machine as a printer, install the supplied printer driver in  
your PC.  
Pulse  
See Rotary pulse.  
R
RAM  
Random Access Memory. Memory that is used for temporary storage of information such as: documents you  
want to print, scanned and received documents, and downloaded fonts.  
Receive mode  
The button that controls how the machine receives fax and telephone calls.  
Receiving  
Receiving transmission is also defined as RX or Reception. The machine can be customized to receive fax  
documents in many ways:  
G
Receive fax documents only (FaxOnly Mode)  
Receive both telephone calls and fax documents on the same line (FaxTel Mode)  
Receive telephone calls and fax documents manually (Manual Mode)  
Receive fax documents automatically and route voice calls to the answering machine (AnsMode)  
G-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception  
See Receiving.  
Redialing-automatic  
See Automatic Redialing.  
Redialing-manual  
See Manual Redialing.  
Reduction mode  
The machine’s automatic feature that slightly reduces the received image to allow room at the top of the page  
for the sender’s ID information. You can also reduce the size of large incoming documents using the <RX  
REDUCTION> option.  
Registering  
A process by which you place fax or telephone numbers and names in the machine’s memory for automatic  
dialing so that you can save time dialing frequently called destinations.  
Regular dialing  
Pressing the individual numeric buttons to dial a fax or telephone number.  
Remote receiving ID  
The two-digit code that enables you to manually activate fax reception using a telephone that is connected to  
the machine.  
Remote reception  
Activating fax reception by answering a telephone that is connected to the machine, but that is not located  
near the machine. You need to dial a remote receiving ID number to start remote reception.  
Report  
A document printed by the machine and containing information about the faxes it has sent or received.  
Resolution  
The density of dots for any given output device. Expressed in terms of dots per inch (dpi). Low resolution  
causes font characters and graphics to have a jagged appearance. Higher resolution means smoother curves  
and angles as well as a better match to traditional typeface designs. Resolution values are represented by  
horizontal data and vertical data, for example, 360 × 360 dpi. This machine produces output with  
1,200 dpi enhanced × 600 dpi precision.  
Rotary pulse  
A telephone dialing system where a dial is rotated to send pulses to the telephone switching system. When  
you pulse dial, you hear clicks. When you touch-tone dial, the most common dialing system, you hear tones.  
Rotary pulse dialing requires certain setting adjustments.  
RX  
See Receiving.  
S
Scanning contrast  
A setting that darkens or lightens the scanning of documents.  
Sender ID  
Information printed at the top of a fax (also called TTI or Transmit Terminal ID):  
G
Date and time the fax was sent  
Sender’s fax/phone number  
Sender’s name  
Your name or company name  
Page number  
G-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending  
A fax document that has been scanned by a fax machine and sent over telephone lines, in the form of  
electrical pulses, to another fax machine. Also called TX or Transmit.  
Sending speed  
The rate at which faxes are transmitted through the phone line. See also bps (bits per seconds).  
STANDARD  
A document setting for sending normal typewritten or printed documents containing only text and no  
drawings, photographs, or illustrations.  
Standby  
The mode in which the machine is on and ready to use.  
T
Timed sending  
See Delayed sending.  
Tone  
A button that allows you to temporarily switch to touch-tone from pulse dialing. In some countries, on-line  
data services may require that you use tone dialing.  
Tone/pulse setting  
The ability to set the machine to match the telephone dialing system your telephone line uses: touch-tone or  
rotary pulse.  
Toner  
A black, resin coated powder contained in the toner cartridge. The machine applies the toner to the surface of  
the photosensitive drum inside the machine via an electrophotographic mechanism.  
Toner saver  
You can enable or disable economy printing (toner saving feature). By enabling the TONER SAVER MODE  
setting, toner consumption can be decreased by approx. 30%, resulting in a longer effective cartridge life.  
Transaction number  
A unique number assigned to each fax document sent (TX NO.) or received (RX NO.) by the machine and  
used to identify that particular fax document.  
Transmit  
TTI  
See Sending.  
Transmit Terminal ID. See Sender ID.  
TX  
See Sending.  
U
UHQ(Ultra High Quality)  
An exclusive Canon digital image processing system that incorporates 256 shades of gray along with a  
special edge enhancement feature which ensures that text and photos are transmitted with ultimate clarity.  
G
G-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
APPENDIX  
Coded Speed Dialing, 5-1, 6-7  
changing or deleting numbers, 5-6  
Numerics  
((-), )(+) buttons, 2-15  
storing numbers, 5-5  
using, 5-7  
Collate copy, 1-3, 11-8  
COMMON SETTINGS, 16-3  
Connection  
A
power cord, 2-8  
telephone line, 2-8  
USB port, 2-7  
Activity Report, 13-1  
ADD. REGISTRATION, 16-14  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder), 2-11, 2-12  
Alarm indicator, 2-14  
COPY button, 2-14  
COPY SETTINGS, 16-5  
COPY STATUS, 12-1  
Copying, 11-1  
AnsMode, 7-1, 7-5  
Answering machine  
using, 7-5  
enlarging/reducing, 11-4  
Attaching components  
specifying the paper size, 11-2  
specifying the paper type, 11-3  
document output tray, 2-5  
output tray, 2-5  
Counter Information, 9-9  
Country  
setting, 2-10  
Custom copy ratio, 11-5  
B
B.T. adaptor, C-1  
Broadcasting, 6-13  
D
Delayed sending, 6-15  
Delayed Transmission button, 2-15  
Delete button, 2-15  
C
Department ID Report, 13-2  
Department Information List, 13-13  
Destination labels, 2-2  
Directory button, 2-15  
Directory Dialing, 5-1, 6-7  
using, 5-13  
Canceling  
automatic redialing, 6-11  
incoming fax, 7-7  
memory sending, 6-10  
restriction, 10-5  
Cartridge T, 2-4  
Cassette, 2-11, 2-12  
Display language  
loading envelopes, 4-5  
loading paper, 2-22, 4-3  
setting, 2-10  
Document  
CD-ROM, 2-2  
loading in the ADF, 6-3  
requirements, 6-1  
scanning area, 6-2  
CHANGE PAPERSIZE message, 14-8  
CHECK DOCUMENT message, 14-8  
CHECK PRINTER message, 14-8  
Clear button, 2-15  
Document feeder tray, 2-11, 2-12  
Document Memory List, 13-14  
Document output tray, 2-11, 2-12  
attaching, 2-5  
Coded Dial button, 2-15  
Coded Speed Dial List, 13-9  
DOCUMENT TOO LONG, 14-8  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DOCUMENTATION, 2-2  
I
ID button, 2-15  
Image Quality button, 2-14  
E
In Use/Memory indicator, 2-14  
INCORRECT PAPER SIZE message, 14-8  
INSTALL CARTRIDGE message, 14-8  
Energy Saver button, 2-14  
Energy saver mode  
restoring from, 2-16  
setting manually, 2-16  
Enlarge/Reduce button, 2-14  
Entering  
L
date and time, 3-3  
method, 3-1  
numbers for Coded Speed Dialing, 5-5  
LCD display, 2-14  
LCD Messages, 14-8  
Long distance dialing, 10-2  
numbers for Group Dialing, 5-9  
numbers for One-Touch Speed Dialing, 5-2  
your fax number and name, 3-4  
Envelope  
M
Maintenance  
loading in the cassette, 4-5  
loading in the multi-purpose feeder, 4-9  
Error Codes, 14-11  
cleaning, 15-1  
handset, B-4  
Error Correction Mode (ECM), 1-2  
Error TX Report, 13-3  
MAKING SPACE IN MEM message, 14-9  
Manual Mode, 7-1, 7-4  
Exposure button, 2-14  
Extension cover, 2-13  
Manual sending, 6-6, 6-9  
MEM IN USE nn % message, 14-9  
Memory Clear Report, 13-6  
MEMORY FULL message, 14-9  
Memory Lock, 10-6  
Extension phone jack, 2-13  
F
password, 10-6  
Memory receiving, 7-6  
F/T RING TIME, 7-2  
F/T SWITCH ACTION, 7-2  
FAX button, 2-14  
Memory sending, 6-6, 6-8  
canceling, 6-10  
redialing automatically, 6-11  
FAX MONITOR, 12-1  
FAX SETTINGS, 16-6  
FaxOnly Mode, 7-1, 7-5  
FaxTel Mode, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3  
setting options, 7-2  
Menu button, 2-14  
Menu System, 16-1  
Multi TX/RX Report, 13-4  
Multi-purpose feeder, 2-11, 2-12  
loading envelope, 4-9  
loading paper, 4-8  
Front view, 2-11  
G
N
Group Dial List, 13-10  
Group Dialing, 5-1, 6-7  
NOT REGISTERED message, 14-9  
changing or deleting numbers, 5-10  
storing numbers, 5-9  
Numeric buttons, 2-14  
using, 5-12, 6-14  
O
H
OK button, 2-15  
One-Touch Speed Dial buttons, 2-15  
One-Touch Speed Dial List, 13-8  
One-Touch Speed Dial panel, 2-15  
Handset, B-1  
I
manual sending, 6-6, 6-9  
Handset jack, 2-13  
HANG UP PHONE, 14-8  
Hook button, 2-15  
I-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-Touch Speed Dialing, 5-1, 6-7  
Recording paper  
loading in the cassette, 2-22, 4-3  
changing or deleting numbers, 5-3  
storing numbers, 5-2  
using, 5-4  
loading in the multi-purpose feeder, 4-8  
printing areas, 4-2  
requirements, 4-1  
Operation panel, 2-11, 2-12, 2-14  
Orientation, 4-11  
Redial/Pause button, 2-15  
Redialing  
automatically, 6-11  
Output tray, 2-11, 2-12  
canceling, 6-11  
manually, 6-11  
setting up, 6-11  
P
Regular Dialing, 6-7  
Paper cassette  
installing, 2-6  
Paper jam  
Removing Jammed Paper from the ADF, 14-7  
REPLACE CARTRIDGE message, 14-9  
Report button, 2-15  
clearing, 14-1  
Paper output area  
REPORT STATUS, 12-1  
Reserve copy, 11-9  
face down, 4-13  
face up, 4-13  
guidelines, 4-12  
selecting, 4-12  
Restriction  
canceling, 10-5  
enabling, 10-4  
operating, 9-8  
setting, 9-4  
PAPER SETTINGS, 16-2  
PBX, 10-1  
Polling  
RING START TIME, 7-2  
receiving, 8-2  
sending, 8-3  
Ringer Equivalence Number (R.E.N.), C-1  
Ringer Volume Switch, B-4  
RX Report, 13-5  
Polling box  
changing settings, 8-5  
deleting, 8-6  
scanning document into the memory, 8-4  
setting up, 8-3  
S
Polling button, 2-15  
Safety instructions, 1-6  
Power Cord, 2-2  
Scanning density  
connecting, 2-8  
adjusting to copy, 11-6  
adjusting to fax, 6-5  
Power socket, 2-13  
Preset copy ratio, 11-4  
PRINT LISTS, 16-18  
PRINT STATUS, 12-1  
Printer cover, 2-11, 2-12  
PRINTER DATA ERROR message, 14-9  
Printer driver, 1-4  
Scanning resolution  
adjusting to copy, 11-6  
adjusting to fax, 6-4  
Setting  
display language and country, 2-10  
receive mode, 7-2  
scanning density (fax), 6-5  
summer time, 3-5  
PRINTER SETTINGS, 16-14  
telephone line type, 3-5  
R
Shipping Materials  
removing, 2-3  
R button, 2-15  
Slide guides, 2-11, 2-12  
Space button, 2-15  
Rear cover, 2-13  
Rear view, 2-13  
Specifications, A-1  
REC. PAPER JAM message, 7-6, 14-9  
Receive mode  
Speed Dialing Lists, 13-7  
START AGAIN message, 14-9  
Start button, 2-15  
AnsMode, 7-1  
FaxOnly, 7-1  
FaxTel, 7-1  
Manual, 7-1  
setting, 7-2  
Stop/Reset button, 2-15  
Summer time  
I
setting, 3-5  
Receive Mode button, 2-15  
SUPPLY REC. PAPER message, 7-6, 14-9  
Switchboard, 10-1  
RECEIVED IN MEMORY message, 14-9  
I-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Administrator’s ID  
changing/cancelling, 9-2  
setting, 9-2  
SYSTEM ERROR, 14-10  
System Monitor button, 2-14  
SYSTEM SETTINGS, 16-16  
T
Telephone line  
connecting, 2-8  
Telephone Line Cord, 2-2  
Telephone line jack, 2-13  
Telephone line type  
setting, 3-5  
TIMER SETTINGS, 16-15  
Tone button, 2-14  
Tone dialing, 10-3  
Toner cartridge  
handling and storing, 2-17  
installing and replacing, 2-18  
Transfer roller, 14-2  
Transporting, 15-5  
TTI, 3-3  
TX Report, 13-4  
TX/RX NO. nnnn**, 14-10  
U
Unpacking, 2-2  
USB port, 2-13  
connecting, 2-7  
User’s Data List, 13-11  
I
I-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CANON INC.  
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
CANON U.S.A., INC.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
CANON CANADA INC.  
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada  
CANON EUROPA N.V.  
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.  
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France  
CANON COMMUNICATION & IMAGE FRANCE S.A.S.  
12, rue de l’Industrie 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France  
CANON (U.K.) LTD.  
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom  
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH  
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany  
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.  
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy  
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.  
703 Waterford Way Suite 400, Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.  
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD  
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia  
CANON CHINA CO., LTD  
15F, North Tower, Beijing Kerry Centre, 1 Guang Hua Road, Chao Yang District,  
100020, Beijing, China  
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.  
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632  
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD  
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
230V  
FA7-8589 (000)  
© CANON INC. 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Box Computer Hardware KV1720A User Manual
Black Decker Coffeemaker TCM830 User Manual
Blue Wave Boats Boat 190 Deluxe User Manual
Bosch Appliances Oven HBG78R70B User Manual
Bradford White Corp Water Heater 547 B User Manual
Brother Sewing Machine NV4750D User Manual
Cannon Electric Pressure Cooker 10460G User Manual
Cateye Cyclometer CC VT100W User Manual
Chief Manufacturing TV Mount LVS1U LVSXU User Manual
Cisco Systems Network Card RSP7000 User Manual